X3
Owner's Manual for the vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
You can find supplementary information in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.
Additional information on the Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
© 2017 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English X/17, 11 17 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 332.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can be called up via the fol‐
lowing Owner's Manuals: Integrated Owner's
Manual in the vehicle, Online Owner's Manual,
BMW Driver's Guide app.
6 Information
At a glance
16 Cockpit
21 Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready
state
23 iDrive
33 BMW Gesture Control
36 Voice activation system
39 General settings
52 Owner's Manual media
Controls
58 Opening and closing
82 Settings
94 Transporting children safely
99 Driving
118 Displays
134 Lights
140 Safety
168 Driving stability control systems
173 Driver assistance systems
208 Driving comfort
209 Climate control
223 Interior equipment
229 Storage compartments
233 Cargo area
Driving tips
242 Things to remember when driving
247 Trailer towing
251 Saving fuel
Mobility
260 Refueling
262 Fuel
268 Wheels and tires
296 Engine compartment
299 Engine oil
303 Coolant
305 Maintenance
307 Replacing components
315 Breakdown assistance
322 Care
Reference
328 Technical data
331 Appendix
332 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Information
Using this Owner's Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
cle.
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as
printed book from the service center.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can be called up via the fol‐
lowing Owner's Manuals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Additional sources of
information
Dealer’s service center
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
questions at any time.
Internet
The Owner's Manual and general information
on BMW, for example on technology, are avail‐
able on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
Integrated Owner's Manual in the
vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
describes features and functions found in the
vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be
displayed on the Control Display. Additional in‐
formation, refer to page 52.
BMW Driver’s Guide App
The BMW Driver's Guide app specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the ve‐
hicle. The app can be displayed on smart‐
phones and tablets. Additional information,
refer to page 53.
Online Owner's Manual
The Online Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the ve‐
hicle. The Online Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played in any of today's browsers. Additional
information, refer to page 54.
Seite 6
Information
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Symbol Meaning
Precautions that must be followed.
To avoid the possibility of personal
injury and serious damage to the
vehicle.
◄ End of a specific item of
information.
Measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment.
"..." Texts in vehicle used to select
individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the
voice activation system.
››...‹‹ Answers generated by the voice
activation system.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
numbered list. The steps must be carried out
in the defined order.
1.
First action step.
2. Second action step.
Enumerations
Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐
ternative possibilities are presented as list with
bullet points.
▷ First possibility.
▷ Second possibility.
Symbols on vehicle components
Refers to the relevant section of this
Owner's Manual for further information on a
particular part or assembly.
Vehicle features and options
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes
and illustrates features and functions that are
not available in your vehicle, for example be‐
cause of the selected optional features or the
country-specific version.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
For any options and equipment not described
in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Manuals.
Your BMW dealer’s service center is happy to
answer any questions that you may have about
the features and options applicable to your ve‐
hicle.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
Seite 7
Information
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
cle.
For Your Own Safety
Intended use
Follow the following when using the vehicle:
▷ Owner's Manual.
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove
stickers.
▷ Technical vehicle data.
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where
the vehicle is driven.
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory docu‐
ments.
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments applying in the country of first delivery,
also known as homologation. If your vehicle is
to be operated in a different country it might be
necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially
differing operating conditions and registration
requirements. If your vehicle does not comply
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐
tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐
formation on warranty is available from a
dealer’s service center.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e. g. the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
a BMW dealer’s service center. If you choose
to use another service facility, BMW recom‐
mends use of a facility that performs work, for
instance maintenance and repair, according to
BMW specifications with properly trained per‐
sonnel, referred to in this Owner's Manual as
"another qualified service center or repair
shop".
If work is performed improperly, for instance
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of sub‐
sequent damage and related safety risks.
Parts and accessories
BMW recommends the use of parts and ac‐
cessory products approved by BMW.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice
on their use and installation are available from
a BMW dealer's service center.
BMW parts and accessories have been tested
by BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW
vehicles.
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
sories.
BMW does not evaluate whether each individ‐
ual product from another manufacturer can be
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
safety hazard, even if a country-specific official
approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate
whether these products are suitable for BMW
vehicles under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
Seite 8
Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐
ranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐
ited Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating
conditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
country or region. In such case, please contact
Customer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system.
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models.
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models.
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Data memory
General information
Electronic control devices are installed in the
vehicle. Some of these are necessary for the
vehicle to function safely or provide assistance
during driving, for instance driver assistance
systems. Furthermore, control devices facili‐
tate comfort or infotainment functions.
Electronic control devices contain data memo‐
ries, which are able to temporarily or perma‐
nently store information about the condition of
the vehicle, component load, maintenance re‐
quirements, technical events or faults.
This information generally records the state of
a component, a module, a system, or the envi‐
ronment, for instance:
▷ Operating states of system components,
e.g., fill levels, tire inflation pressure, bat‐
tery status.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its in‐
dividual components, e.g., wheel rotational
speed, wheel speed, deceleration, trans‐
verse acceleration, engaged safety belt in‐
dicator.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
tem components, for instance lights and
brakes.
▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or en‐
gagement of the stability control systems.
▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain
sensor signals.
Seite 9
Information
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
The data is required to perform the control de‐
vice functions. Furthermore, it also serves to
recognize and correct malfunctions, and helps
the vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle
functions. The majority of this data is transient
and is only processed within the vehicle itself.
Only a small proportion of the data is stored in
event or fault memories and, if needed, in the
vehicle key.
Reading out data
When servicing, for instance during repairs,
service processes, warranty cases, and quality
assurance measures, this technical information
can be read out from the vehicle together with
the vehicle identification number. A dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop can read out the information.
The socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis re‐
quired by law in the vehicle is used to read out
the data. The data is collected, processed, and
used by the relevant organizations in the serv‐
ice network. The data documents the technical
conditions of the vehicle, helps in locating
faults and improving quality, and is transferred
to the vehicle manufacturer, if needed.
Furthermore, the manufacturer has product
monitoring duties to meet in line with product
liability law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle
manufacturer needs technical data from the
vehicle. Fault and event memories in the vehi‐
cle can be reset when a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop performs repair or servicing work.
Data on the scope of servicing work performed
and maintenance records are stored in the ve‐
hicle by means of the service history and trans‐
ferred to the vehicle manufacturer. The vehicle
owner can contact a dealer's service center to
object to the data being stored and transferred
to the vehicle manufacturer. This objection ap‐
plies for as long as the vehicle owner remains
the proprietor of the vehicle.
Data entry and data transfer into the
vehicle
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some
data can be transferred into the vehicle when
using comfort and infotainment functions,
for instance:
▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or
photos for playback in an integrated multi‐
media system.
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction
with an integrated hands-free system or an
integrated navigation system.
▷ Entered navigation destinations.
▷ Data on the use of Internet services.
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or
is found on a device that has been connected
to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or
MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle,
it can be deleted at any time. This data is only
transmitted to third parties if expressly desired.
This depends on the personal settings se‐
lected for using online services.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the fol‐
lowing comfort and individual settings can be
stored in the vehicle and modified at any time,
for instance:
▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel
positions.
▷ Suspension and climate control settings.
▷ Individual settings, for instance lighting in
the car's interior.
Control via mobile devices
Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile
devices connected to the vehicle, for instance
smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle
control elements. The sound and picture from
the mobile device can be played back and dis‐
played through the multimedia system. Certain
information is transferred to the mobile device
at the same time. Depending on the type of
Seite 10
Information
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
connection, this includes, for instance position
data and other general vehicle information.
This optimizes the way in which selected apps,
for instance navigation or music playback,
work.
There is no further interaction between the
mobile device and the vehicle, for instance ac‐
tive access to vehicle data. How the data will
be processed further is determined by the pro‐
vider of the particular app being used. The ex‐
tent of the possible settings depends on the
respective app and the operating system of the
mobile device.
Services
General information
If the vehicle has a wireless network connec‐
tion, this enables data to be exchanged be‐
tween the vehicle and other systems. The
wireless network connection is realized via an
in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via
personal mobile devices brought into the vehi‐
cle, for instance smartphones. This wireless
network connection enables 'online functions'
to be used. These include online services and
apps supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or
by other providers.
Services from the vehicle
manufacturer
Where online services from the vehicle manu‐
facturer are concerned, the corresponding
functions are described in the appropriate
place, for instance the Owner's Manual or
manufacturer's website. The relevant legal in‐
formation pertaining to data protection is pro‐
vided there too. Personal data may be used to
perform online services. Data is exchanged
over a secure connection, for instance with the
IT systems of the vehicle manufacturer in‐
tended for this purpose. Any collection, proc‐
essing, and use of personal data above and be‐
yond that needed to provide the services must
always be based on a legal permission, con‐
tractual arrangement or consent.
In addition, the vehicle manufacturer evaluates
anonymized information on transport infra‐
structure and how the infotainment system is
used. This information cannot be traced back
to individual vehicles or people. Evaluating the
data enables the manufacturer to further im‐
prove its products or services, for instance by
incorporating the most up-to-date traffic bulle‐
tins. The data transfer feature can be deacti‐
vated in the vehicle. Certain services and func‐
tions, some of which are subject to a charge,
can be deactivated by the driver. It is also pos‐
sible to activate or deactivate the data connec‐
tion as a whole. That is, with the exception of
functions and services required by law such as
Assist systems.
Services from other providers
When using online services from other provid‐
ers, these services are the responsibility of the
relevant provider and subject to their data pri‐
vacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle
manufacturer has no influence on the content
exchanged during this process. Information on
the way in which personal data is collected and
used in relation to services from third parties,
the scope of such data, and its purpose, can be
obtained from the relevant service provider.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
Seite 11
Information
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
tions and no personal data, for instance name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Vehicle identification
number
The vehicle identification number can be found
in the engine compartment, on the right-hand
side of the vehicle.
The vehicle identification number can be found
on the type label, on the right-hand side of the
vehicle.
The vehicle identification number can also be
found behind the windshield.
It is also possible to display the vehicle identifi‐
cation number via iDrive, refer to page 44.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
Seite 12
Information
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
formation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 13
Information
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
At a glance
This chapter shows the arrangement of the
buttons, switches and displays. Moreover, you
will become familiar with the available control
concepts and options quickly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Safety switch 79
2 Power windows 78
3 Exterior mirror operation 88
4 Opening/closing the tail‐
gate 69
5 Lights
Front fog lights 138
Light switch 134
Lights off
Daytime running lights 135
Parking lights 134
Automatic headlight control 135
Adaptive light functions 136
High-beam Assistant 136
Seite 16
At a glance Cockpit
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Low beams 134
Instrument lighting 138
Right roadside parking light 134
Left roadside parking light 134
6 Central locking system
Unlock 67
Locking 67
7 Seating comfort features
Memory function 90
8 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 106
High beams, head‐
light flasher 106
High-beam Assistant 136
Onboard Computer 128
9 Steering wheel buttons, left
Cruise control on/off 173
Active Cruise Control on/off 175
Steering and lane control assis‐
tant on/off 182
Cruise control: store speed
Pause or continue cruise control
Active Cruise Control: increase
distance
Active Cruise Control: reduce dis‐
tance
With steering and lane control as‐
sistant: adjust distance
Cruise control rocker switch
10 Instrument cluster 118
11 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source, see Own‐
er's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment and Communication 6
Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Voice activation system 36
Telephone, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Thumbwheel for selection lists 127
12 Steering column stalk, right
Wipers 106
Rain sensor 107
Clean the windshield and head‐
lights 108
Seite 17
Cockpit At a glance
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Rear window wiper 108
Clean the rear window 108
13 Switch drive-ready state on/
off 99
Auto Start/Stop function 100
14 Horn, entire surface
15 Heated steering wheel 90
16 Adjust the steering wheel 90
17 Unlock hood 297
18 Glove compartment 230
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 23
2 Ventilation 215
3 Hazard warning system 315
Intelligent Safety 143
4 Glove compartment 229
5 Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communi‐
cation 6
6 Automatic climate control 209
7 Controller with buttons 24
Seite 18
At a glance Cockpit
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
8 Parking brake 103
Automatic Hold 104
9 PDC Park Distance Control 186
Without Surround View: rearview
camera 190
Surround View 193
Crossing traffic warning 205
Parking assistant 200
Surround View: Panorama
View 193
HDC Hill Descent Control 171
10 Driving Dynamics Control 115
SPORT driving mode
COMFORT driving mode
ECO PRO driving mode
ADAPTIVE driving mode
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 168
11 Steptronic transmission selector
lever 110
In the vicinity of the roofliner
1 Emergency Request, SOS 317 2 Glass sunroof 79
Seite 19
Cockpit At a glance
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready
state
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in
one of the three states:
▷ Idle state.
▷ Standby state.
▷ Drive-ready state.
Idle state
Concept
If the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched off.
All power consumers are deactivated.
General information
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening
from the outside and after exiting and locking.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, for instance due to the fol‐
lowing actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Automatic idle state
The idle state is automatically established un‐
der the following conditions:
▷ After several minutes, if no operation takes
place on the vehicle.
▷ If the charge state of the vehicle battery is
low.
▷ Depending on the setting via iDrive, if one
of the front doors is opened when exiting
the vehicle.
The idle state is not automatically established
while a phone call is active.
Seite 21
Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready state At a glance
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Establishing idle state when opening
the front doors
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Turn off after door opening"
Manual idle state
To establish idle state in the vehicle after end
of trip:
Hold button down until the OFF
indicator on the instrument clus‐
ter goes out.
Standby state
Concept
When standby state is switched on, most func‐
tions can be used while the vehicle is station‐
ary. Desired settings can be adjusted.
General information
The vehicle is in the standby state after the
front doors are opened from the outside.
Display in the instrument cluster
OFF is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster. The drivetrain is
switched off and standby state
switched on.
Drive-ready state
Concept
Switching on drive-ready state corresponds to
starting the engine.
General information
Some functions, such as DSC Dynamic Stabil‐
ity Control, can only be used with drive-ready
state switched on.
Follow further information on the drive-ready
state, refer to page 99.
Switching on drive-ready state
Drive-ready state is switched on
via the Start/Stop button:
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Display in the instrument cluster
When drive-ready state is switched on, the
tachometer shows the current engine speed.
Switching off drive-ready state
Press the Start/Stop button to switch off drive-
ready state. The vehicle switches into standby
state.
Seite 22
At a glance Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready state
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
iDrive
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Concept
The iDrive combines the functions of many
switches. These functions can be operated via
the Controller and, depending on the equip‐
ment version, the touchscreen.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information
systems and communication devices while
driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident. Only use the systems or devices
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary,
stop and use the systems and devices while
the vehicle is stationary.◀
Control elements
Overview
1 Control Display, with touchscreen depend‐
ing on the equipment version
2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
the equipment version, with touchpad
Control Display
General information
To clean the Control Display, follow the care
instructions, refer to page 325.
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Control Display, for instance due to intense so‐
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced
down to complete deactivation. Once the tem‐
perature is reduced, for instance through
shade or air conditioning, the normal functions
are restored.
Safety information
NOTE
Objects in the area in the front of the
Control Display can shift and damage the Con‐
trol Display. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not place objects in the area in front of
the Control Display.◀
Seite 23
iDrive At a glance
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Switching on
1. Switch on standby state.
2. Press the Controller.
Switching off
1.
Press button.
2. "Turn off control display"
Controller with navigation system
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the Controller, refer to
page 29.
Operation
▷ Turn.
▷ Press.
▷ Move in four directions.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: call up main menu.
Press twice: display all menu items
of the main menu.
Open the Communication menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
Open destination input menu for
navigation.
Open navigation map.
Press once: open the previous dis‐
play.
Press and hold: open the menus
used last.
Open the Options menu.
Seite 24
At a glance iDrive
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Controller without navigation system
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Operation
▷ Turn.
▷ Press.
▷ Move in two directions.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: call up main menu.
Press twice: display all menu items
of the main menu.
Open the Communication menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
Press once: open the previous dis‐
play.
Press and hold: open the menus
used last.
Open the Options menu.
Operating with the Controller
Opening the main menu
Press button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Adapting the main menu
1. Press the button twice.
All menu items of the main menu are dis‐
played.
Seite 25
iDrive At a glance
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
2. Select a menu item.
3. To move the menu item to the desired po‐
sition, tilt the Controller to the right or left.
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, for in‐
stance "iDrive settings".
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, for instance
"iDrive settings", a new display appears.
▷ Move the Controller to the left.
Closes the current display and shows the
previous display.
▷
Press button.
The previous display opens.
▷ Move the Controller to the right.
New display is opened.
The arrow indicates that additional displays
can be opened.
Opening recently used menus
The recently used menus can be displayed.
Press and hold this button.
Opening the Options menu
Press button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
The Options menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, for instance "Split
screen".
▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, for instance for "Media/Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, for instance "Save
station".
Changing settings
1.
Select a field.
Seite 26
At a glance iDrive
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is displayed.
3. Press the Controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the func‐
tion.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Entering letters and numbers
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
Controller or the touchscreen. The keyboard's
display changes automatically.
Input
1.
Turn the Controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. : confirm entry.
Deleting
Symbol Function
Press the Controller: delete letters
or number.
Hold the Controller down: delete all
letters or numbers.
Switching between upper/lower case,
numbers and characters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers.
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the
choice is narrowed down with every letter en‐
tered and letters may be added automatically.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during entry
for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: place names can be
entered in all languages that are available
in iDrive.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en‐
tries, the letters for which there is an entry are
displayed at the left edge.
1.
Turn the Controller to the left or right
quickly.
All letters for which there are entries are
displayed on the left edge.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐
played.
Seite 27
iDrive At a glance
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Operating via touchscreen
General information
The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐
screen.
Touch screen with your fingers. Do not use
any objects.
Opening the main menu
Tap on symbol.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Adapting the main menu
1.
Tap on symbol.
All menu items of the main menu are dis‐
played.
2. Drag the menu item to the desired position
on the right or left.
Selecting menu items
Tap desired menu item.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, for in‐
stance "iDrive settings".
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, a new display
opens.
The arrow indicates that additional displays
can be opened.
▷ Swipe to the left.
▷ Tap on symbol.
New display is opened.
Changing settings
Settings such as volumes can be changed via
the touchscreen.
▷ Slide in the selected field to the right or
left, until the desired setting is displayed.
▷ , Tap on symbol.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
Seite 28
At a glance iDrive
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
menu item activates or deactivates the func‐
tion.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Entering letters and numbers
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
Controller or the touchscreen.
The keyboard's display changes automatically.
Symbol Function
Tapping the symbol: delete the let‐
ter or number.
Tapping and holding the symbol for
an extended period: delete all letters
or numbers.
Switching between upper/lower case,
numbers and characters
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Operating navigation map
The navigation map can be moved with the
touchscreen.
Function Operation
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out with the fin‐
gers.
Touchpad
General information
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the Controller.
Selecting functions
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Touchpad"
4. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
▷ "Map": using the map.
▷ "Search fields": write letters without
selecting the list field.
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
letters and numbers.
Entering letters and numbers
Entering letters requires some practice at the
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
following:
▷ The system distinguishes between upper
and lower-case letters and numbers. To
make entries, it may be necessary to
change between upper and lower-case let‐
ters, numbers and characters, refer to
page 27.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
the Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such
as accents or periods so that the letter can
be clearly recognized. The set language
determines what input is possible. Where
necessary, enter special characters via the
Controller.
Seite 29
iDrive At a glance
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Entering special characters
Input Operation
Delete a charac‐
ter.
Swipe to the left on the
touchpad.
Enter a blank
space.
Swipe to the right in the
center of the touchpad.
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the
upper area of the touch‐
pad.
Enter an under‐
score.
Swipe to the right in the
lower area of the touch‐
pad.
Using the map
The map in the navigation system can be
moved via the touchpad.
Function Operation
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐
rection.
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out on the touch‐
pad with fingers.
Display menu. Tap once.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed in sev‐
eral menus on the right side of the split screen,
for instance information from the Onboard
Computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when switching to another menu.
Switching the split screen on/off
1. Press button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
The display can be selected in menus, where
the split screen is supported.
1. Move the Controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. Select the desired setting.
Specifying the number of displays
It is possible to specify the number of displays.
1.
Move the Controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. "Personalize menu"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. Move the Controller to the left.
Status information
General information
The status field can be found in the upper area
of the Control Display. Status information is
displayed in the form of symbols.
Status field symbols
Radio
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Seite 30
At a glance iDrive
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Telephone
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Signal strength of cellular network.
Network search.
Cellular network is not available.
The critical charge state of the mo‐
bile phone has been reached.
Roaming is active.
SMS text message received.
Message received.
Reminder.
Sending not possible.
Contacts are loaded.
Entertainment
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
Bluetooth audio.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
WiFi.
iPod.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Check Control message.
The sound output has been
switched off.
Request for the current vehicle po‐
sition.
Checking the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation
destinations, phone numbers and menu en‐
tries or pages in the Integrated Owner's
Manual.
Settings are stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Storing a function
1.
Select function via iDrive.
2.
Press and hold the desired button
until a signal sounds.
Running a function
Press button.
The function will work immediately. This
means, for instance that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves
or use objects.
Seite 31
iDrive At a glance
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
The button assignment is displayed at the top
edge of screen.
Deleting the button assignments
1.
Press and hold buttons 1 and simulta‐
neously for approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
Seite 32
At a glance iDrive
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
BMW Gesture Control
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Concept
Several iDrive functions can be operated by
hand motion only using BMW Gesture Control.
Overview
The gestures that are performed underneath
the interior mirror are captured by a camera in
the roofliner.
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Gestures"
4. "Gesture control"
Settings
▷ "Display tips": the possible gesture is
shown on the Control Display.
▷ "Audio feedback": an acoustic signal is
emitted once the gesture is recognized.
Seite 33
BMW Gesture Control At a glance
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Possible gestures
Gesture Operation Function
Move index finger forward and backward in the
direction of the screen.
Accept call.
Select a highlighted entry in a
list during voice activation.
"Resume guidance" Confirm
popup.
Swipe with the hand across the width of the
Control Display in the direction of the front-pas‐
senger side.
Reject call.
Close popup.
Terminate voice activation.
Slowly move forearm clockwise in a circular pat‐
tern with the index finger stretched out forward.
Gesture is detected after one circular motion.
Increase the volume.
Slowly move forearm counterclockwise in a cir‐
cular pattern with the index finger stretched out
forward.
Gesture is detected after one circular motion.
Reduce the volume.
Pinch with thumb and index finger and move
hand horizontally to the right or left.
Surround View: turn camera
view.
This gesture can only be exe‐
cuted while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
Move stretched out index and middle finger for‐
ward.
Individually assignable gesture.
Perform gestures underneath the interior mir‐
ror and next to the steering wheel.
Execute gestures clearly.
The gestures can also be executed from the
front-passenger side.
Assigning gesture individually
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Gestures"
Seite 34
At a glance BMW Gesture Control
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
4. "Function assignment"
5. Select the desired setting.
System limits
Gesture recognition by the camera can be dis‐
turbed by the following circumstances:
▷ The camera lens is covered.
▷ Objects are located on the interior mirror.
▷ The camera lens is dirty. Clean the camera
lenses, refer to page 325.
▷ The gesture is executed outside of the de‐
tection range.
▷ Wearing of gloves or jewelry.
▷ Smoking in the car's interior.
Seite 35
BMW Gesture Control At a glance
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Concept
Most functions displayed on the Control Dis‐
play can be operated by voice commands via
the voice activation system. The system sup‐
ports you with announcements during input.
General information
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary can only be operated
via the voice activation system to a limited
extent.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal
instructions to use with the voice activation
system.
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
Functional requirements
To enable voice command recognition, a lan‐
guage must be set via iDrive that is supported
by the voice activation system.
To set the language, refer to page 39.
Using the voice activation
system
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol in the instrument cluster
indicates that the voice activation sys‐
tem is active.
If no other commands are possible, operate
the function via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
General information
Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
Commands from other menus can also be spo‐
ken.
You may select list entries such as phone list
entries via voice activation. Read these list en‐
Seite 36
At a glance Voice activation system
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
tries out loud exactly as they are shown in the
respective list.
Displaying possible commands
The following is displayed in the top area of the
Control Display:
▷ Some possible commands for the current
menu.
▷ Some possible commands from other me‐
nus.
▷ Status of the voice recognition.
▷ Encrypted connection is not available.
Help on the voice activation system
▷ To have the available spoken instructions
read out loud: ›Voice commands‹.
▷ To have information on the operating prin‐
ciple of the voice activation system read
out loud: ›General information on voice
control‹.
▷ To have help for the current menu read out
loud: ›Help‹.
Example: opening the tone
settings
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the Controller.
1.
Switch on the Entertainment sound output,
if needed.
2.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Media and radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
Settings
Setting the voice dialog
You can set the system to use standard dialog
or a short version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays
back short messages in abbreviated form.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speech mode:"
5. Select the desired setting.
Selecting the input language
For some languages, the input language can
be selected.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Voice control:"
5. Select the desired setting.
Activating voice recognition via the
server
The voice recognition feature via the server
provides a dictation function and a natural
method of entering destinations while improv‐
ing the quality of voice recognition. To use the
functions, data is transmitted to a service pro‐
vider via an encrypted connection and stored
locally there.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Server speech recognition"
Speaking during voice output
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
voice activation system. The function can be
deactivated if inquiries are often undesirably
interrupted, for instance due to background
noise or talking.
Seite 37
Voice activation system At a glance
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speaking during voice output"
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Information for Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 317, close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 38
At a glance Voice activation system
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
General settings
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Language
Setting the language
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 37.
Time
Setting the time zone
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time zone:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the time
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed.
8. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the time format
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time format:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features: setting the clock time
display
The clock time can be displayed in analog or
digital form.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
Seite 39
General settings At a glance
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Time"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Automatic time setting
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Automatic time setting"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Date
Setting the date
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Make the settings for the month and year.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the date format
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date format:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the units of
measurement
You can set the units of measurement for
some values, for example, fuel consumption,
distances and temperature.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Units"
4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Activating/deactivating the
display of the current vehicle
position
Concept
If vehicle location has been activated, the cur‐
rent vehicle position can be displayed in the
BMW Connected app or in the Connected‐
Drive customer portal.
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Vehicle tracking"
4. "Vehicle tracking"
Seite 40
At a glance General settings
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Activating/deactivating
popup windows
For some functions, popup windows are dis‐
played automatically on the Control Display.
Some of these popup windows can be acti‐
vated or deactivated.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Pop-ups"
4. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Control Display
Brightness
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Selecting the contents of the main
menu
For some menu items of the main menu, the
displayed contents can be selected.
1. Press button.
2. "Contents of main menu"
3. Select the desired menu and the desired
content.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Messages
Concept
The menu centrally displays all messages ar‐
riving in the vehicle in list form.
General information
The following messages can be displayed:
▷ Traffic messages.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Communication messages, for example e-
mails, SMS text messages or reminders.
▷ Service requirements messages.
Messages are additionally displayed in the sta‐
tus field.
Retrieving messages
Via iDrive:
1.
"Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
The respective menu is opened, where the
message is displayed.
Deleting messages
All messages, except Check Control mes‐
sages, can be deleted from the list. Check
Control messages are displayed as long as
they are relevant.
Via iDrive:
1.
"Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
3.
Press button.
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all
notifications"
Seite 41
General settings At a glance
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Settings
The following settings can be adjusted:
▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐
sages will be permitted.
▷ Sort the messages according to date or
priority.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Notifications"
4. Select the desired setting.
Data protection
Data transfer
Concept
The vehicle offers different functions, whose
use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv‐
ice provider. The data transfer can be deacti‐
vated for some functions.
General information
With data transfer deactivated, the respective
function cannot be used.
Only make these settings while stationary.
Activating/deactivating the data
transfer
Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
Via iDrive:
1.
Switch on standby state.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "iDrive settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. Select the desired setting.
Deleting personal data in the vehicle
Concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores
personal data, such as stored radio stations.
This personal data can be permanently deleted
using iDrive.
General information
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:
▷ Driver profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.
▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destina‐
tions.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cook‐
ies.
▷ Office data, for instance voice notes.
▷ Login accounts.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 15 minutes.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data
Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐
trol Display.
Via iDrive:
1.
Switch on standby state.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "iDrive settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. "Delete personal data"
6. "Delete personal data"
Seite 42
At a glance General settings
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
7. "OK"
8. Exit and lock the vehicle.
After 15 minutes, the deletion process is com‐
pleted.
If not all of the data was deleted, repeat the de‐
letion.
Canceling deletion
Switch on the drive-ready state to cancel dele‐
tion of the data.
Connections
Concept
Various connection types are available for us‐
ing mobile devices in the vehicle. The connec‐
tion type to select depends on the mobile de‐
vice and the desired function.
General information
The following overview shows possible func‐
tions and the suitable connection types for
them. The scope of functions depends on the
mobile device.
Function Connection
type
Making calls via the hands-free
system.
Using phone functions via
iDrive.
Using the smartphone Office
functions.
Bluetooth.
Playing music from the smart‐
phone or the audio player.
Bluetooth or
USB.
Using compatible apps via
iDrive.
Bluetooth or
USB.
Function Connection
type
USB storage device:
Exporting and importing driver
profiles.
Performing software updates.
Exporting and importing stored
trips.
Playing music.
USB.
Playing videos from the smart‐
phone or the USB storage de‐
vice.
USB.
Using the vehicle Internet ac‐
cess.
Internet
hotspot.
Use Apple Carplay apps via
iDrive and voice operation.
Bluetooth
and WiFi.
Screen Mirroring:
Showing the smartphone dis‐
play on the Control Display.
WiFi
The following connection types require one-
time pairing with the vehicle:
▷ Bluetooth.
▷ Internet hotspot.
▷ Apple CarPlay.
▷ Screen Mirroring.
Paired devices are automatically recognized
later on and connected to the vehicle.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information
systems and communication devices while
driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident. Only use the systems or devices
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary,
stop and use the systems and devices while
the vehicle is stationary.◀
Seite 43
General settings At a glance
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Compatible devices
General information
Information on mobile devices compatible with
the vehicle can be found at www.bmwusa.com/
bluetooth.
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed
or deviating software versions.
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
When looking for compatible devices, you may
have to state the vehicle identification number
and the software part number. These numbers
can be displayed in the vehicle.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info"
6. "System information"
A software update, refer to page 50, can be
performed, if needed.
Bluetooth connection
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 44, with
Bluetooth interface.
▷ The remote control or BMW display key is
in the vehicle.
▷ The device is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth is switched on in the vehicle, re‐
fer to page 44, and on the device.
▷ Bluetooth pre-settings, such as visibility,
may be required on the device; refer to the
owner's manual of the device.
Switching on Bluetooth
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth®"
Activating/deactivating telephone
functions
To use all supported functions of a mobile
phone, the following functions must be acti‐
vated prior to pairing the mobile phone with
the vehicle.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Office"
Activate function to transmit short
messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks,
notes, and reminders to the vehicle.
Costs can be incurred by transmitting
all data to the vehicle.
▷ "Contact images"
Activate function to show the contact
pictures.
6. Move the Controller to the left.
Pairing the mobile device with the
vehicle
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. Select functions:
Seite 44
At a glance General settings
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ "Telephone"
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
▷ "Apps"
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
▷ "Screen Mirroring"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played on the Control Display.
6. Search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity
of the mobile device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile device display.
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.
7. Depending on the mobile device, a control
number is displayed or the control number
must be entered.
▷ Compare the control number displayed
on the Control Display with the control
number on the display of the device.
Confirm the control number on the de‐
vice and on the Control Display.
▷ Enter and confirm the same control
number on the device and via iDrive.
The device is connected and displayed in
the device list, refer to page 49.
Frequently asked questions
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as
expected.
In this case, the following explanations can
help:
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or
connected?
▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices
connected to the mobile phone or vehicle.
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connec‐
tions with other devices.
Delete all known Bluetooth connections
from the device list on the mobile phone
and start a new device search.
▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode
or has only a limited remaining battery life.
Charge mobile phone.
Why does the mobile phone no longer react?
▷ The applications on the mobile phone do
not function anymore.
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
▷ Too high or too low ambient temperature
for mobile phone operation.
Do not subject the mobile phone to ex‐
treme ambient temperatures.
Why can phone functions not be used via
iDrive?
▷ The mobile phone may not be properly
configured, for instance as Bluetooth audio
device.
Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐
phone or additional phone function.
Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐
played or why are they incomplete?
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
are transmitted.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts
from social networks.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for
instance due to stored information such as
notes.
Reduce the data volume of the contact.
▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as
audio source or as telephone.
Configure the mobile phone and connect it
with the telephone or additional phone
function.
Seite 45
General settings At a glance
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
How can the phone connection quality be im‐
proved?
▷ Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal
on the mobile phone, depending on the
mobile phone.
▷ Insert mobile phone into the wireless
charging tray.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and
loudspeakers separately in the sound set‐
tings.
If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available, con‐
tact the hotline, a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
USB connection
General information
Mobile devices with a USB port are connected
to the USB interface.
▷ Mobile phones.
▷ Audio devices such as MP3 players.
▷ USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported.
FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended
formats.
The following applications are possible:
▷ Exporting and importing driver profiles, re‐
fer to page 72.
▷ Playing music files via USB audio.
▷ Playing videos via USB video.
▷ Loading of software updates, refer to
page 50.
Follow the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB storage device against
mechanical damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB media
available on the market, it cannot be guar‐
anteed that every device is operable on the
vehicle.
▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐
ronmental conditions, such as very high
temperatures; refer to the owner's manual
of the device.
▷ Due to the many different compression
techniques, proper playback of the media
stored on the USB storage device cannot
be guaranteed in all cases.
▷ A connected USB storage device will be
supplied with charging current via the USB
interface if the device supports this.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the
stored data, do not charge a USB storage
device via the onboard socket, when it is
connected to the USB interface.
▷ Depending on how the USB storage device
is being used, settings may be required on
the USB storage device, refer to the own‐
er's manual of the device.
Not compatible USB media:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
serts.
▷ HFS-formatted USB media.
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
Functional requirement
Compatible device, refer to page 44, with USB
interface.
Connecting the device
Connect the USB storage device using a suita‐
ble adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to
page 228.
The USB storage device is displayed in the de‐
vice list, refer to page 49.
Seite 46
At a glance General settings
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Internet connection
General information
Up to 8 devices can be connected with the In‐
ternet hotspot.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 44, with
WiFi interface.
▷ ConnectedDrive contract.
▷ Data contract with a service provider.
▷ WiFi activated on the device.
▷ Internet hotspot activated in the vehicle.
▷ Standby state switched on.
Activating the Internet hotspot
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Internet hotspot"
Connecting device with Internet
hotspot
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. "Internet hotspot"
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐
played on the Control Display.
6. Search for WiFi networks on the device.
Select network name on the device.
7. Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐
nect.
The device is displayed in the device list, refer
to page 49.
With the first Internet usage via the Internet
hotspot, data volume must be purchased from
a service provider.
All devices connected via the Internet hotspot
use this data volume.
If necessary, data volume can be purchased
from the ConnectedDrive Store.
Settings
The network name and hotspot code can be
changed. In addition, the network name can be
hidden so that it cannot be found by other de‐
vices.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4.
Press button.
5.
▷ "Change hotspot key"
Enter the desired hotspot code.
▷ "Change hotspot name"
Enter the desired network name.
▷ "Hide hotspot"
Activate or deactivate the function.
6. Confirm the entry of the hotspot code or
network name:
Select the symbol.
Apple CarPlay preparation
Concept
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compati‐
ble Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice op‐
eration and iDrive.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible iPhone, refer to page 44.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
Seite 47
General settings At a glance
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation
are switched on on the iPhone.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following settings:
▷ "Bluetooth®"
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
Pairing iPhone with CarPlay
Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle, refer
to page 44.
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and
displayed in the device list, refer to page 49.
Operation
For more information, see the Integrated Own‐
er's Manual, Online Owner's Manual, BMW
Driver's Guide app or the Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communica‐
tion.
Frequently asked questions
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as
expected.
In this case, the following explanations can
help:
The iPhone has already been paired with Apple
CarPlay. When a new connection is estab‐
lished, CarPlay can no longer be selected.
▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the de‐
vice list.
▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con‐
cerned from the list of stored vehicles un‐
der Bluetooth and under WiFi.
▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.
If the steps listed have been carried out and
the required function is still not available: con‐
tact the hotline, a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Screen Mirroring
General information
Screen Mirroring enables mirroring (output‐
ting) of the smartphone display on the Control
Display.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible smartphone, refer to page 44,
with Screen Mirroring interface.
▷ Screen Mirroring is switched on on the
smartphone.
▷ WiFi is switched on in the vehicle.
Switching on WiFi
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Vehicle Wi-Fi®"
Pairing a smartphone with Screen
Mirroring
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. "Screen Mirroring"
Seite 48
At a glance General settings
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
The WiFi name of the vehicle is displayed
on the Control Display.
6. Search for WiFi devices in the surround‐
ings of the smartphone.
The WiFi name of the vehicle appears on
the device display. Select the WiFi name of
the vehicle.
7. Confirm the connection via iDrive.
The device is connected and displayed in the
device list, refer to page 49.
Managing mobile devices
General information
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are au‐
tomatically recognized and reconnected
when standby state is switched on.
▷ The data stored on the SIM card or in the
mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle
after recognition.
▷ For some devices, certain settings are nec‐
essary, for instance authorization; see the
owner's manual of the device.
Displaying the device list
All devices paired with or connected to the ve‐
hicle are displayed in the device list.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
A symbol indicates, for which function a device
is used.
Symbol Function
"Telephone"
"Additional telephone"
"Bluetooth® audio"
"Apps"
"Internet hotspot"
Symbol Function
"Apple CarPlay"
"Screen Mirroring"
Configuring the device
Functions can be activated or deactivated for
paired and connected devices.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select the desired device.
5. Select the desired setting.
If a function is assigned to a device, the func‐
tion will be deactivated where appropriate for a
device that is already connected and the de‐
vice will be disconnected.
Disconnecting the device
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Disconnect device"
The device remains paired and can be con‐
nected again, refer to page 49.
Connecting the device
A disconnected device can be reconnected.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Connect device"
Seite 49
General settings At a glance
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
The functions that were assigned to the device
before disconnecting are assigned to the de‐
vice when it is reconnected. If the device is al‐
ready connected, these functions are deacti‐
vated.
Deleting the device
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Delete device"
The device is disconnected and removed from
the device list.
Swapping the telephone and
additional phone
If two mobile phones are connected to the ve‐
hicle, the functions of the phone and additional
phone can be switched.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."
Software update
General information
The vehicle supports a large number of mobile
devices, for instance mobile phones and MP3
players. Software updates are available for
many of the supported devices. The vehicle is
maintained up-to-date via regular vehicle soft‐
ware updates.
Updates and related current information is
available at www.bmw.com/update.
Displaying the installed software
version
The software version installed in the vehicle is
displayed.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Show current version"
If an update has been carried out before, select
the desired version to display additional infor‐
mation.
Updating software via USB
The software may only be updated when the
vehicle is stationary.
Via iDrive:
1.
Store the file for the software update in the
main directory of a USB flash drive.
2. Connect the USB storage device to a USB
interface, refer to page 228.
3. "My Vehicle"
4. "iDrive settings"
5. "Software update"
6. "Update software"
7. "USB"
8. "Install software"
9. "OK"
10. Wait for the update to complete.
11. "Shut down system"
If necessary, switch off the engine first.
Restoring the software version
The software version before the last software
update and the version before the first soft‐
ware update can be restored.
The software may only be restored when the
vehicle is stationary.
Seite 50
At a glance General settings
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Restore software"
5.
▷ "Previous version"
The previous software version is re‐
stored.
▷ "Default software settings"
The first software version is restored.
6. "Remove software"
7. "OK"
8. Wait for restore.
9. "Shut down system"
If necessary, switch off the engine first.
Seite 51
General settings At a glance
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Owner's Manual media
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
You can use various media formats to call up
the content in the Owner's Manual. The follow‐
ing Owner's Manual media formats are availa‐
ble:
▷ Printed Owner's Manual, refer to
page 52.
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle,
refer to page 52.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app, refer to
page 53.
▷ Online Owner's Manual, refer to page 54.
There are different features, refer to page 55,
in each of the different media formats.
Printed Owner's Manual
Concept
The printed Owner's Manual describes all
standard, country-specific, and optional fea‐
tures offered with the series.
General information
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as
printed book from the service center.
Supplementary Owner's Manuals
Also follow the instructions of the Supplemen‐
tary Owner's Manuals, which are included in
addition to the onboard literature.
Integrated Owner's Manual
in the vehicle
Concept
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
describes features and functions found in the
vehicle.
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display.
Selecting the Owner's Manual
1. Press button.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "Owner's Manual"
4. Select the required method of accessing
the contents.
Scrolling through the owner's manual
Turn the Controller, until the next or previous
contents are displayed.
Context help
General information
The section of the Owner's Manual relating to
the function that is currently selected can be
displayed directly.
Opening via iDrive
Change directly to the Options menu from the
function on the Control Display:
1. Press button.
Seite 52
At a glance Owner's Manual media
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
2. "Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, for instance radio, to
the Owner's Manual on the Control Display
and to alternate between the two displays:
1. Press button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press button again to return to last
displayed function.
5.
Press button to return to the page of
the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate continuously between the last dis‐
played function and the last displayed page of
the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5.
Opens a new display every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The jumps into the Owner's Manual can be
stored on the programmable memory buttons,
refer to page 31, and called up directly.
Storing
1.
Select the desired entry point via iDrive:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Keyword search"
▷ "Animations"
2.
Press desired programmable
memory button and hold for more than
2 seconds.
Executing
Press the corresponding button.
The owner's manual is directly dis‐
played at the selected entry point.
BMW Driver’s Guide App
Concept
The BMW Driver's Guide app specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the ve‐
hicle.
The app can be displayed on smartphones and
tablets.
General information
The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
tries as an app. Additional information on the
Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Entering the vehicle identification number fil‐
ters the contents.
Vehicles
It is possible to store Owner's Manuals for vari‐
ous vehicles in the app.
It is also possible to test the app using a dem‐
onstration vehicle.
Operating systems and language
The app is available for the iOS and Android
operating systems.
The Owner's Manual is downloaded in the lan‐
guage of the device.
Seite 53
Owner's Manual media At a glance
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Online Owner's Manual
Concept
The Online Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the ve‐
hicle.
The Online Owner's Manual can be displayed
in any of today's browsers.
General information
The Online Owner's Manual is available in
many countries. An account on the customer
portal may be required.
Entering the vehicle identification number fil‐
ters the contents.
Vehicles
It is possible to store several individual Own‐
er's Manuals for various vehicles.
Language
The language is based on whichever language
is set in the operating system.
Printing
You can use the print function for automatically
formatting and printing out individual chapters.
Media components
General information
The following components are not available to
the same extent in all media formats.
Additional information on availability, refer to
page 55.
Quick Reference Guide
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
tion on how to operate the vehicle, how to use
basic vehicle functions and what to do in case
of a breakdown.
Search by illustrations
Based on illustrations, image search provides
information and descriptions. This is helpful
when the terminology for a feature is not at
hand.
Frequently asked questions
This chapter provides answers to frequently
asked questions about your vehicle and helpful
links to additional information.
Quick links
The chapter on quick links explains the most
important information and operating instruc‐
tions on the basis of various situations.
Videos
The videos explain the main functions of the
systems.
Smart Scan
You can use Smart Scan to scan various sym‐
bols in the vehicle. After a brief explanation of
the symbol in question appears, it is then pos‐
sible to display the chapter directly.
Smart Scan is only available for the iOS oper‐
ating system.
Keyword search
You can use keywords to search for informa‐
tion and descriptions in the media.
Seite 54
At a glance Owner's Manual media
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Key features
Printed Integrated APP Online
All equipment included. X — — —
Equipment included in vehicle. — X X X
Quick Reference Guide. — X X X
Search by illustrations. — X X X
Frequently asked questions. — — X X
Quick links. — — X X
Videos. — X X X
Smart Scan. — — X —
Keyword search. X X X X
X: included.
—: not included.
Seite 55
Owner's Manual media At a glance
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Controls
The information in this chapter helps you in
confidently operating your vehicle. All features
and accessories that are useful for driving and
your safety, comfort and convenience are
described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Remote control
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key.
Each remote control contains a replaceable
battery. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 61.
You may set the key functions depending on
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
sion. Settings, refer to page 74.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every
remote control. Driver profile, refer to
page 72.
The remote controls hold information about re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐
mote control, refer to page 305.
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take
the remote control with you so that the vehicle
can be opened from the outside.◀
WARNING
For some country-specific variants, un‐
locking from the inside is only possible with
special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, for instance due to the fol‐
lowing actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
Seite 58
Controls Opening and closing
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
3 Opening the tailgate
4 Press and hold or press three times in
quick succession: panic mode
Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture
Unlocking
Press button on the remote control.
Depending on the settings, refer to page 74,
the following access points are unlocked:
▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap.
Press the button of the remote control
again to unlock the other vehicle access
points.
▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap.
In addition, the following functions are exe‐
cuted:
▷ The settings stored in the driver profile, re‐
fer to page 72, are applied.
▷ The driver's seat is set to the last position
saved in the driver's profile. This function
must be activated in the settings, refer to
page 74.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off. Switch
the interior lights on/off manually, refer to
page 138.
▷ Depending on the settings, the welcome
light and headlight courtesy delay feature,
refer to page 135, are switched on.
▷ Automatically folded in exterior mirrors are
folded open. This function must be acti‐
vated in the settings, refer to page 74.
▷ The rear sun protection of the glass sun‐
roof is moved into the position where it
was prior to locking.
▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft pro‐
tection is switched off.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 76, is
switched off.
After opening one of the front doors, the vehi‐
cle is ready for operation, refer to page 22.
The light functions may depend on the ambi‐
ent brightness.
Convenient opening
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the remote
control is pressed.
Locking
1.
Close the driver's door.
2.
Press button on the remote control.
▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
are locked.
▷ The rear sliding visor of the glass sunroof
is closed.
▷ The exterior mirrors are folded in. This
function must be activated in the settings,
refer to page 74.
▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft pro‐
tection is switched on. This prevents the
doors from being unlocked using the lock
buttons or the door openers.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 76, is
switched on.
If the drive-ready state is still switched on
when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn
honks twice. In this case, the drive-ready state
must be switched off by means of the Start/
Stop button.
Seite 59
Opening and closing Controls
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
With Comfort Access: convenient
closing
Safety information
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.◀
Closing
Press and hold this button on the remote
control in the area close to the vehicle af‐
ter locking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are closed,
as long as the button on the remote control is
pressed.
Switching on the interior and exterior
lights
Press button on the remote control with
the vehicle locked.
The function is not available for the first
10 seconds after locking.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off. Switch
the interior lights on/off manually, refer to
page 138.
▷ Depending on the settings, the headlight
courtesy delay feature, refer to page 135,
is switched on. The welcome light is only
switched on when the vehicle is being un‐
locked.
The light functions may depend on the ambi‐
ent brightness.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on the features and the country
version, it is also possible to have the doors
unlocked. Adjusting the settings, refer to
page 74.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is a risk of damage to property.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
Opening
Press and hold button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press button on the remote con‐
trol and hold for at least 3 sec‐
onds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐
trol three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Seite 60
Controls Opening and closing
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Switching on the headlight courtesy
delay feature
Press button on the remote control.
Set the duration, refer to page 135.
Replacing the battery
1. Remove the integrated key from the re‐
mote control, refer to page 66.
2. Place the integrated key underneath the
battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and
lift the cover with a lever movement of the
integrated key, arrow 2.
3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow
using a pointed object and lift it out.
4. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the pos‐
itive side facing up.
5. Press the cover closed.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
Additional remote controls
Additional remote controls are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Loss of the remote controls
A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐
placed by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message, refer to page 119,
is displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstan‐
ces:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 61.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with electronic devices.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a
charging process of mobile devices, for in‐
stance charging of a mobile phone.
▷ The remote control is in direct proximity of
the wireless charging tray.
Place the remote control down at a differ‐
ent location.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can be
unlocked and locked from the outside with the
integrated key, refer to page 66.
Seite 61
Opening and closing Controls
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Switching the drive-ready state on via
emergency detection of the remote
control
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
state if the remote control has not been de‐
tected.
Proceed as follows in this case:
1.
Hold the remote control with its back
against the marked area on the steering
column. Pay attention to the display in the
instrument cluster.
2. If the remote control is detected:
Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
onds.
If the remote control is not detected, slightly
change the position of the remote control and
repeat the procedure.
BMW display key
General information
The BMW display key is supplied with an addi‐
tional mechanical key. If the display key is
used, the mechanical key should be carried
with you, for instance in the wallet.
The display key supports all functions of the
standard remote control.
In addition, the following functions are also
available:
▷ Display status of doors and windows.
▷ Display status of the anti-theft warning
system.
▷ Display service information.
▷ Call up range with available fuel.
▷ With parked-car heating: operate parked-
car heating.
Without parked-car heating: operate
parked-car ventilation.
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take
the remote control with you so that the vehicle
can be opened from the outside.◀
WARNING
For some country-specific variants, un‐
locking from the inside is only possible with
special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, for instance due to the fol‐
lowing actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Seite 62
Controls Opening and closing
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Overview
1 Opening the tailgate
2 Unlocking
3 Press and hold or press three times in
quick succession: panic mode
Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture
4 Locking
5 Display
6 Back
7 Switch the display on/off
8 Micro-USB charging socket
Reception range
The number of available display key functions
depends on the distance from the vehicle.
▷ When you are in close proximity to the ve‐
hicle, all functions of the display key are
available.
▷ The status information can be called up in
the extended reception range.
With parked-car heating: the parked-car
heating can be operated.
Without parked-car heating: the parked-car
ventilation can be operated.
▷ Outside of the reception range of the vehi‐
cle, you can display the last transmitted
status information from the vehicle.
The symbol is shown on the display if one
of the buttons is pressed outside of the recep‐
tion range.
Display
General information
The display is divided into the upper status
line, the information area, and the lower status
line.
Upper status line
The upper status line displays the following in‐
formation:
▷ Vehicle secured.
Vehicle not secured.
▷ Set time in the vehicle.
▷ Charge state of the display key bat‐
tery.
Information area
The information area can be used to access in‐
formation and perform additional functions.
If the information area contains more than one
page, then page indicators are shown beneath
the information.
The indicator for the current page has
been filled in.
Swipe to the right or left with a finger to
change between the pages.
If further information is available on a page, tap
the appropriate symbol.
To return to the original page: tap on the
symbol beneath the display.
Lower status line
The lower status line indicates whether or not
the display key is within reception range, refer
to page 63.
▷ "Connected": the display key is within re‐
ception range.
▷ "Updated": the display key is not within re‐
ception range. It indicates when the last
data transfer from the vehicle took place.
Seite 63
Opening and closing Controls
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Switching on/off
The display will go out automatically after a
brief period to conserve battery power.
To hide the display manually:
Press the button on the left side of the display
key. Overview, refer to page 63.
To show the display:
1. Press the button on the left side of the dis‐
play key.
2. Then, swipe with your finger from bottom
to top to unlock the screen lock.
To switch off the display to increase the usable
battery life:
1.
Press and hold the button on the left side
of the display key for longer than 4 sec‐
onds.
2. "OK"
To switch the display on:
Press the button on the left side of the display
key.
Operating concept
The following information shows how to ac‐
cess the information and functions using the
main menus.
Main menu Information/Function
"Security
information"
/
Door status.
Alarm system status.
After alarm triggering: date,
time, and reason for trigger‐
ing the alarm.
Window status.
Glass sunroof status.
Main menu Information/Function
"Vehicle
information"
Maintenance indicators of
Condition Based Service
CBS, refer to page 305.
Status of the roadside park‐
ing lights.
"Mobility info" Range with available fuel.
"Precondit.
setting"
With parked-car heating: op‐
erate parked-car heating, re‐
fer to page 218.
Without parked-car heating:
operate parked-car ventila‐
tion, refer to page 218.
Display key battery
General information
Follow the following information:
▷ If the charge state of the display key bat‐
tery declines, the display is switched off
automatically. The battery must be re‐
charged so that the display can be
switched back on. The operability of the
standard buttons is retained until the bat‐
tery is completely discharged.
▷ Charge the battery for at least three hours
before using the display key for the first
time or if the key has not been used for an
extended period.
▷ The display key can be used while it is be‐
ing charged. If the battery is fully dis‐
charged, it may take some time before the
display key can be used again.
▷ Due to the large number of USB chargers
available on the market, it cannot be guar‐
anteed that every charger will function
properly. The charging duration depends
on the charger used.
▷ During charging, the charger and the dis‐
play key may become warm. At higher
temperatures, the display key may cause a
reduction in the charging current, and in
Seite 64
Controls Opening and closing
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
isolated cases the charging process may
be interrupted temporarily.
Charging
Via USB
Connect the display key via the micro-USB
charging socket to a USB port.
In the wireless charging tray
1. Open the tray cover.
2. Place the display key into the middle of the
wireless charging tray in front of the cup
holders.
Ensure that the display is facing up.
3. Close the tray cover.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
BMW display key detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstan‐
ces:
▷ The battery of the display key is dis‐
charged. Charge the battery, refer to
page 64.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the display key due to metal
objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a
charging process of mobile devices, for in‐
stance charging of a mobile phone.
Do not transport the display key together with
metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with
the mechanical key.
Switching on drive-ready state via
emergency detection of the BMW
display key
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
state if the display key has not been detected.
Proceed as follows in this case:
1.
Hold the display key with its back against
the marked area on the steering column.
Pay attention to the display in the instru‐
ment cluster.
2. If the display key is detected:
Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
onds.
If the display key is not detected, slightly
change the position of the display key and re‐
peat the procedure.
Resetting the BMW display key
If the charged display key cannot be switched
on anymore or if the display does not respond
to entries anymore, the display key can be re‐
set.
Seite 65
Opening and closing Controls
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Press and hold the button on the left side of
the display key for at least 20 seconds, until
something appears on the display.
Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without remote control using the integrated
key.
The integrated key also fits the glove compart‐
ment.
Safety information
WARNING
For some country-specific variants, un‐
locking from the inside is only possible with
special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.◀
NOTE
The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the
integrated key inserted, paint or the integrated
key can be damaged. There is a risk of damage
to property. Remove the integrated key before
pulling the outside door handle.◀
Removing
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
Locking/unlocking via the door lock
1.
Pull the door handle outward with the left
hand and hold it.
2. Guide one finger of your right hand from
the back under the cover, feel for the re‐
lease there, and press it outward.
Seite 66
Controls Opening and closing
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
3. Use your left thumb to push the cover to
the right.
4. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not switched on if the ve‐
hicle is locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via
the door lock.
In order to stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle
with the remote control, if necessary through
emergency detection of the remote control, re‐
fer to page 61.
Buttons for the central
locking system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
Overview
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
Press the button with the front doors
closed.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft
when locking.
Unlocking
Press button.
Opening
▷ Press the button to unlock all the
doors.
Pull the door opener above the armrest.
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the
door to open the door. The other doors re‐
main locked.
▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle
on the door to be opened; the first time un‐
locks the door, the second time opens it.
The other doors remain locked.
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
Seite 67
Opening and closing Controls
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
car's interior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Open the tailgate.
▷ Open and close the tailgate with no-touch
activation.
Functional requirements
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle near
the doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Unlocking
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
Locking
Close the driver's door.
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a
closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.
1 second without grasping the door handle.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
Convenient closing
Safety information
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.◀
Closing
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a
closed vehicle door with your finger and hold it
there without grasping the door handle.
This corresponds to pressing and holding the
button on the remote control.
In addition to locking, the windows and glass
sunroof will be closed.
Seite 68
Controls Opening and closing
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Opening the tailgate
General information
If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,
locked doors are not unlocked.
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is a risk of damage to property.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
Opening
Press the button on tailgate's exterior.
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstan‐
ces:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 61.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with electronic devices.
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock‐
ing request recognition function on the door
handles.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to
page 66.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on the features and the country
version, it is also possible to have the doors
unlocked. Adjusting the settings, refer to
page 74.
Seite 69
Opening and closing Controls
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is a risk of damage to property.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
Tailgate
Opening
Adjusting the opening height
You can set how far the tailgate should open.
When adjusting the opening height, ensure
that there is a clearance of at least 4 in/10 cm
above the tailgate.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Tailgate"
5. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired
opening height.
From the outside
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or
have the remote control with you.
Press the button on tailgate's exterior.
▷ Press button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may also
be unlocked. Opening with the remote control,
refer to page 60.
If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens
automatically to the adjusted opening height.
From the inside
With Steptronic transmission:
Press the button in the driver's door
downward.
If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position
P must be engaged first.
With manual transmission:
With the vehicle stationary, push the
button in the storage compartment of the driv‐
er's door downward twice in quick succession.
If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens
automatically to the adjusted opening height.
Interruption of the opening procedure
The opening procedure is interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
Seite 70
Controls Opening and closing
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of
the tailgate. Pressing again closes the tail‐
gate.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate.
▷ By pressing the button on the remote con‐
trol. Pressing again continues the opening
motion.
▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the
driver's door. Pressing again continues the
opening motion.
Closing
From the outside
Press the button on tailgate's exterior.
From the inside
Pull and hold the button in the driver
door.
The remote control must be located in the
car's interior for this function.
An acoustic signal sounds before the tailgate is
closed.
From inside the tailgate
Without Comfort Access:
Press button on the inside of the tailgate.
With Comfort Access:
▷ Press the button, arrow 1, on the inside of
the tailgate.
▷ Press button, arrow 2.
The vehicle will be locked after closing the
tailgate. The driver's door must be closed
for this purpose and the remote control
must be outside of the vehicle in the area
of the tailgate.
Interruption of the closing procedure
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky move‐
ment.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of
the tailgate. Pressing again re-opens the
tailgate.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate. Pressing again re-opens the tail‐
gate.
▷ By releasing the button in the driver's door.
Pressing again and holding continues the
closing motion.
Malfunction
Safety information
WARNING
With manual operation of a blocked tail‐
gate, it can release itself unexpectedly from
the blockage. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Do not operate the tail‐
gate manually if it is blocked. Have it checked
Seite 71
Opening and closing Controls
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.◀
Manual operation
Operate the unlocked tailgate manually with a
slow and smooth motion.
To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly
only. Closing occurs automatically.
Automatic Soft Closing
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed while operat‐
ing the doors. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the doors is
clear during opening and closing.◀
Closing
To close the doors, push lightly.
Closing occurs automatically.
Driver profile
Concept
In the driver profiles, individual settings for
several drivers can be stored and called up
again when required.
General information
There are three driver profiles with which per‐
sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐
mote control has one of these driver profiles
assigned.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
trol, the assigned personal driver profile will be
activated. All settings stored in the driver pro‐
file are automatically applied.
If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings
during unlocking. These settings are also re‐
stored, if the vehicle has been used in the
meantime by a person with a different remote
control.
Changes to the settings are automatically
stored in the driver profile currently activated.
If another driver profile is selected via iDrive,
the settings stored in it will be applied auto‐
matically. The new driver profile is assigned to
the remote control currently used.
There is an additional guest profile available
that is not assigned to any remote control. It
can be used to apply settings in the vehicle
without changing the personal driver profiles.
Functional requirements
For the system to be able to identify the driver
profile associated to a particular driver, the de‐
tected remote control must be clearly allo‐
cated to the driver.
This is the case when:
▷ The driver is only carrying his or her own
remote control.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle.
▷ The driver gets into the vehicle through the
driver's door.
Active driver profile
After switching on the Control Display, the
name of the active driver profile is displayed.
Select driver profile, refer to page 73.
As soon as the engine is started or any key is
pressed, the last selected display is shown on
the Control Display.
To exit the welcome screen via iDrive:
"OK"
Settings
The settings for the following systems and
functions are stored in the active driver profile.
The scope of storable settings depends on
country and equipment.
▷ Unlocking and locking.
Seite 72
Controls Opening and closing
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ Lights.
▷ Climate control.
▷ Radio.
▷ Instrument cluster.
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
▷ Volumes, tone.
▷ Control Display.
▷ Navigation.
▷ PDC Park Distance Control.
▷ Rearview camera.
▷ Panorama View.
▷ Head-up Display.
▷ Driving Dynamics Control.
▷ Seat position, exterior mirror position.
Both the positions saved via the seat mem‐
ory and the last position set are saved.
▷ Intelligent Safety.
Profile management
Selecting a driver profile
Regardless of the remote control in use, a dif‐
ferent driver profile may be activated. This al‐
lows you to call up personal vehicle settings,
even if you did not unlock the vehicle with your
own remote control.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
4. "OK"
▷ All settings stored in the called-up driver
profile are automatically applied.
▷ The called-up driver profile is assigned to
the remote control being used at the time.
▷ If the driver profile is already assigned to a
different remote control, this driver profile
will apply to both remote controls.
Guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings that
are stored in none of the three personal driver
profiles.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Drive off (guest)"
4. "OK"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
assigned to the current remote control.
Renaming a driver profile
A personal name can be assigned to the active
driver profile to avoid confusion between the
driver profiles.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be renamed.
4. "Change driver profile name"
5. Enter profile name.
6. Select the symbol.
Resetting a driver profile
The settings of the active driver profile are re‐
set to their factory settings.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be reset.
4. "Reset driver profile"
5. "OK"
Seite 73
Opening and closing Controls
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Exporting driver profiles
Most settings of the active driver profile can be
exported.
Exporting is helpful when storing and retrieving
personal settings, for instance before deliver‐
ing the vehicle to a workshop. The stored
driver profiles can be taken into another vehi‐
cle.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be exported.
4. "Export driver profile"
5. Select a storage device for exporting the
driver profile.
▷ "USB device"
Select USB storage device, as needed,
refer to page 46.
▷ Online
Via the BMW ConnectedDrive cus‐
tomer portal.
Importing driver profiles
The existing settings of the active driver profile
are overwritten with the settings of the im‐
ported driver profile.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select the driver profile to be overwritten.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be overwritten.
4. "Import driver profile"
5. Select a storage device for importing the
driver profile.
▷ USB storage device: "USB device"
Select USB storage device as needed.
▷ Online.
6. Select the driver profile to be imported.
System limits
A clear assignment between the remote con‐
trol and driver may not be possible in the fol‐
lowing cases, for example.
▷ The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his
or her own remote control, but another
person is driving.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
Access and has multiple remote controls
with him or her.
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
locked and unlocked.
▷ Multiple remote controls are located out‐
side of the vehicle.
Settings
General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, various settings for open‐
ing and closing are possible.
These settings are stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Unlocking
Doors
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
Seite 74
Controls Opening and closing
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Tailgate
Depending on optional features and country
version, this setting is not offered in some
cases.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Select the symbol.
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Tailgate"
The tailgate is opened.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
The tailgate is opened and the doors
unlocked.
Adjusting the last seat and mirror
position
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The setting can be made for the driver
profile marked with this symbol.
4. "Last seat position automatic"
When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's seat
and exterior mirrors resume their last set posi‐
tions.
The most recent position is independent of the
positions saved via the seat memory.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
mation signals.
▷ "Flash for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
locking by one.
▷ With alarm system:
"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two honks of
the horn, locking by one.
Automatic locking
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Select desired setting:
▷ "Lock automatically"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if no door is
opened after unlocking.
▷ "Lock after starting to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off.
Automatic unlocking
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Unlock at end of trip"
After drive-ready state is switched off by
pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked
vehicle is automatically unlocked.
Folding mirrors automatically
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
Seite 75
Opening and closing Controls
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Fold mirrors in when locked"
Locking the vehicle folds in the exterior
mirrors automatically. Unlocking the vehi‐
cle automatically folds out the exterior mir‐
rors.
Establishing idle state after opening
the front doors
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Turn off after door opening"
Opening the front doors establishes the
idle state, refer to page 21.
Alarm system
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes:
▷ Opening a door, the hood, or the tailgate.
▷ Movements in the car's interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
the vehicle.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
▷ Improper use of the socket for OBD On‐
board Diagnosis.
The alarm system signals these changes visu‐
ally and acoustically:
▷ Acoustic alarm.
Depending on local regulations, the acous‐
tic alarm may be suppressed.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
Switching on/off
When you unlock and lock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or with Comfort Ac‐
cess, the alarm system is switched off and on
at the same time.
Opening the doors with the alarm
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door is
opened if the door was unlocked using the
integrated key in the door lock.
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 77.
Opening the tailgate with the alarm
system switched on
The tailgate can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
monitored again provided the doors are
locked. The hazard warning system flashes
once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press button on the remote con‐
trol and hold for at least 3 sec‐
onds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐
trol three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Seite 76
Controls Opening and closing
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Indicator light on the interior mirror
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 sec‐
onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
access points are secured.
When the still open access points are
closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
sensor will be switched on.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlock‐
ing:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking
until drive-ready state is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi‐
cle is towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthor‐
ized action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐
cles, at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
▷ At the gas station: if the vehicle is locked
after refueling starts.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion
sensor can be switched off in such situations.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.
The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked
again.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐
trol, if needed, through emergency detec‐
tion of the remote control, refer to page 61.
▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying
the remote control on your person, grasp
the driver side or front passenger side door
handle completely.
Seite 77
Opening and closing Controls
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Power windows
Safety information
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
Overview
Power windows
Safety switch
Functional requirements
The windows can be operated under the fol‐
lowing conditions.
▷ Standby state is established.
▷ Drive-ready state is established.
▷ The remote control is in the car's interior.
Opening
▷ Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is be‐
ing held.
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐
fer to page 59.
Closing
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is be‐
ing held.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically if the
door is closed. Pulling again stops the mo‐
tion.
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 67.
Jam protection system
General information
If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as
a window closes, closing is interrupted.
The window opens slightly.
Safety information
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such as an‐
tennas can impact jam protection. There is a
risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the
area of movement of the windows.◀
Closing without the jam protection
system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance
point and hold it there.
The window closes with limited jam pro‐
tection. If the closing force exceeds a spe‐
cific threshold, closing is interrupted.
Seite 78
Controls Opening and closing
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
2.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds and
hold it there.
The window closes without jam protection.
Safety switch
Concept
The safety switch in the driver's door can be
used to prevent children, for instance from
opening and closing the rear windows using
the switches in the rear.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED lights up if the safety func‐
tion is switched on.
Roller sunblinds, rear side
windows
WARNING
With closed roller sunblinds and open
windows, the roller sunblinds can be loaded
heavily while driving due to the wind. The roller
sunblinds can be damaged and compromise
the occupants. There is a risk of injury. Do not
open the windows while driving if the roller
sunblinds are closed.◀
Pull out the roller sunblind at the strap and
hook it onto the bracket.
Glass sunroof
General information
The glass sunroof and the sun protection are
operated using the same switch.
The glass sunroof is ready for operation when
standby state is switched on.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀
Overview
Opening/closing the glass sun‐
roof.
Functional requirements
The glass sunroof can be operated under the
following conditions.
▷ Standby state is established.
▷ Drive-ready state is established.
▷ The remote control is in the car's interior.
Lifting/closing glass sunroof
Push switch briefly upward.
▷ The closed glass sunroof
tilts and the sun protection
opens slightly.
▷ The opened glass sunroof
closes until it is in the tilted
position. The sun protection
does not move.
▷ The tilted glass sunroof closes.
Seite 79
Opening and closing Controls
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sun protection separately
▷ Press the switch in the de‐
sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
Holding down the switch
opens the sun protection. If
the sun protection is already
fully open, the glass sunroof
opens.
The glass sunroof closes
while the switch is being
held. If the glass sunroof is
already closed or in the tilted
position, the sun protection
closes.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
The sun protection opens automatically. If
the sun protection is already fully open, the
glass sunroof opens automatically.
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If
the glass sunroof is already closed or in the
tilted position, the sun protection closes
automatically.
Pressing the switch upward stops the mo‐
tion.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sun protection together
Briefly press the switch twice in
succession in the desired direc‐
tion past the resistance point.
The glass sunroof and sun pro‐
tection move together. Pressing
the switch upward stops the motion.
Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐
fer to page 59.
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 67.
Comfort position
In some models, the wind noises in the car's
interior are lowest when the glass sunroof is
not fully open. In these models, the automatic
function initially only opens the glass sunroof
up to this comfort position.
Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun‐
roof fully.
Jam protection system
General information
If the closing force exceeds a certain value
when closing the glass sunroof, the closing op‐
eration is interrupted once the roof reaches the
half-open position, or it is stopped when clos‐
ing from the tilted position.
The glass sunroof opens slightly.
Closing from the open position
without jam protection
If there is an external danger, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1.
Push the switch forward past the resist‐
ance point and hold.
The glass sunroof closes with limited jam
protection. If the closing force exceeds a
specific threshold, closing is interrupted.
2. Push the switch forward again past the re‐
sistance point and hold until the glass sun‐
roof closes without jam protection. Make
sure that the closing area is clear.
Seite 80
Controls Opening and closing
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Closing from the raised position
without jam protection
If there is an external danger,
push the switch forward past the
resistance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes without jam protec‐
tion.
Initializing after a power interruption
General information
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
operated to a limited extent.
The system can be initialized under the follow‐
ing conditions.
▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi‐
tion.
▷ The drive-ready state is established.
▷ The external temperature is above
41 ℉/5 ℃.
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing the system
Press the switch up and hold it
until the initialization is com‐
plete:
Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is completed
when the glass sunroof and sun protection are
completely closed.
Seite 81
Opening and closing Controls
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Settings
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Sitting safely
An ideal seating position that meets the needs
of the occupants can make a vital contribution
to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
In the event of an accident, the correct seating
position plays an important role. Follow the in‐
formation in the following chapters:
▷ Seats, refer to page 82.
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 84.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 86.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 140.
Seats, front
Safety information
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts can no longer be ensured. There is
a risk of sliding under the safety belt in an acci‐
dent. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust
the backrest so that it is in the most upright
position as possible and do not adjust again
while driving.◀
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Electrically adjustable seats
General information
The seat adjustment for the driver's seat is
stored for the driver profile currently used.
When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote
control, the position is automatically retrieved
if the function, refer to page 75, is activated for
this purpose.
The current seat position can be stored using
the memory function, refer to page 90.
Overview
1 Backrest width
2 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
3 Backrest tilt
4 Lumbar support
Seite 82
Controls Settings
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Forward/backward
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Push switch up or down.
Seat tilt
Move switch up or down.
Backrest tilt
Move switch forward or backward.
Thigh support
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push
the thigh support forward or back.
Lumbar support
Concept
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
Settings
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the button:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the button:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Seite 83
Settings Controls
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Functional limitations
It may not be possible to adjust the lumbar
support at very high and very low tempera‐
tures.
Backrest width
Concept
Adjusting the backrest width may improve lat‐
eral support when taking corners.
General information
You can change the backrest width by adjust‐
ing the side wings of the backrest.
To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,
the backrest width temporarily opens fully.
Settings
▷ Press the front section of
the button:
The backrest width de‐
creases.
▷ Press the rear section of the
button:
The backrest width in‐
creases.
Functional limitations
It may not be possible to adjust the backrest
width at very high and very low temperatures.
Rear seats
General information
The backrest tilt can be adjusted for the rear
seats. The backrest tilt for the center section is
adjusted together with the left backrest.
Backrest tilt
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Safety belts
Number of safety belts and safety belt
buckles
The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to en‐
sure occupant safety. However, they can only
offer protection when adjusted correctly.
The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear
seats are intended for the persons sitting on
the left and right.
The center safety belt buckle of the rear seats
is intended for the person sitting in the middle.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by the occupants before driving off. The
airbags supplement the safety belts as an ad‐
ditional safety device. The airbags are not a
substitute for safety belts.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point
will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Safety information
WARNING
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than
one person will potentially defeat the ability of
the safety belt to serve its protective func‐
tion.There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Seite 84
Controls Settings
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Do not allow more than one person to wear a
single safety belt. Infants and children are not
allowed on an occupant's lap, but must be
transported and secured in designated child
restraint systems.◀
WARNING
The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened safety belt can cause additional inju‐
ries, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure
that all occupants are wearing safety belts cor‐
rectly.◀
WARNING
The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, may not be fully functional or fail
in the following situations:
▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any other
way.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety
belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt
retractors or belt anchors and keep them
clean. Have the safety belts checked after an
accident at the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to
your body over your lap and shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips
over your lap. The safety belt may not
press on your stomach.
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or
fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up‐
ward around your upper body.
Buckling the safety belt
1. Slowly guide the safety belt out of the
holder when fastening it.
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt
buckle. The safety belt buckle must en‐
gage audibly.
To ease accessibility to the safety belt buckle,
an adjustable slider is available on the belt to
help position the buckle when not in use.
When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's
and passenger's belt straps are automatically
tightened once after driving away.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1.
Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the safety belt
buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
and front passenger seat
Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light lights up and a sig‐
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
belts are positioned correctly. The
safety belt reminder can also be activated if
objects are placed on the front passenger seat.
Seite 85
Settings Controls
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Safety mode
In critical situations, for instance during an
emergency stop, the front safety belts tighten
automatically.
If the situation passes without an accident oc‐
curring, the belt tension relaxes.
If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐
cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety
belt using the red button in the safety belt
buckle. Fasten the safety belt before continu‐
ing on your trip.
Front head restraints
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head re‐
straints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back of
the head. Adjust the distance via the back‐
rest tilt as needed.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.◀
Adjusting the height
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height, move the head re‐
straint up or down slightly, making sure it en‐
gages properly.
Adjusting the distance
▷ Back: press the button and push the head
restraint toward the rear.
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the
front.
After setting the distance, move the head re‐
straint forward or backward slightly, making
sure it engages properly.
Seite 86
Controls Settings
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐
sistance.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
restraint.
Rear head restraints
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head re‐
straints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back of
the head. Adjust the distance via the back‐
rest tilt as needed.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.◀
Folding down the head restraint
To improve the view to the rear, the head re‐
straints can be folded back. Only fold the head
restraint back if no one will be sitting in the
corresponding seat.
▷ To the rear: press the button, arrow 1, and
fold the head restraint backward.
▷ To the front: fold head restraint forward un‐
til the head restraint engages.
Seite 87
Settings Controls
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Adjusting the height
The height of the outer head restraints can be
adjusted.
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height, move the head re‐
straint up or down slightly, making sure it en‐
gages properly.
Removing
The outer head restraints can be removed.
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1.
Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to
page 236, in question.
2. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐
sistance.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
restraint.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
The mirror setting is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently in use. When the vehicle is un‐
locked via the remote control, the position is
automatically retrieved if the function, refer to
page 75, is activated for this purpose.
The current exterior mirror position can be
stored using the memory function, refer to
page 90.
Safety information
WARNING
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. The distance to the traffic
behind could be incorrectly estimated, for in‐
stance while changing lanes. There is a risk of
an accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic
behind by looking over your shoulder.◀
Overview
1 Settings
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out
Adjusting electrically
Press button.
Seite 88
Controls Settings
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
The selected mirror moves along with the but‐
ton movement.
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror
glass.
Folding in and out
NOTE
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
hicle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There
is a risk of damage to property. Before wash‐
ing, fold in the mirrors by hand or with the but‐
ton.◀
Press button.
Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap‐
prox. 15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the
following situations:
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever drive-ready state is switched on.
Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells in the car's inte‐
rior mirror, refer to page 89, are used to con‐
trol this.
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior
mirror
Concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward.
This improves your view of the curb and other
low-lying obstacles when parking, for instance.
Activating
1.
Slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
When towing a trailer, the Automatic Curb
Monitor is deactivated.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger's
side mirror position.
Interior mirror, manually dimmable
To reduce the blinding effect of the interior
mirror, flip the lever forward.
Interior mirror, automatic dimming
feature
General information
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Seite 89
Settings Controls
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Overview
Functional requirements
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the interior
mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
Manual steering wheel adjustment
1.
Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Heated steering wheel
Overview
Heated steering wheel
Switching on/off
Press button.
A Check Control message is dis‐
played.
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes
after an intermediate stop, the heated steering
wheel activates automatically if the function
was switched on at the end of the last trip.
Memory function
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory func‐
tion:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ Height of the Head-up Display.
General information
Two memory locations with different settings
can be set for each driver profile, refer to
page 72.
The following settings are not stored:
▷ Backrest width.
▷ Lumbar support.
Seite 90
Controls Settings
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Safety information
WARNING
Using the memory function while driving
can lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of an accident. Only retrieve the
memory function when the vehicle is station‐
ary.◀
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Overview
The memory buttons are located on the front
doors.
Storing
1.
Set the desired position.
2.
Press button. The writing on the
button lights up.
3. Press desired button 1 or 2 while the LED
is lit. A signal sounds.
Calling up settings
The stored position is called up automatically.
Press selected button 1 or 2.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat is pressed or one of the memory but‐
tons is pressed again.
While driving, the seat position adjustment on
the driver's side is interrupted after a short
time.
Seat heating
Overview
Front
Seat heating
Rear
Seat heating
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
Highest level if three bars are shown on the cli‐
mate control display.
When ECO PRO is activated, refer to
page 252, the heater output is reduced.
Seite 91
Settings Controls
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Switching off
Press button and hold until bar display
on the climate control display goes
out.
Seat heating distribution
The heating action in the seat cushion and the
seat backrest can be distributed in different
ways.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. Select a menu item:
▷ "Seat heating"
▷ "Seat and steering wheel heating"
▷ "Seat climate control"
▷ "Seat climate / steer. wheel heating"
5. Select the desired seat, if needed.
6. Press the Controller and turn it to set the
seat heating distribution.
Active seat ventilation
Concept
The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are
cooled by means of integrated fans.
The ventilation cools the seat, for instance if
the car's interior is overheated or for continu‐
ous cooling at high temperatures.
Overview
Active seat ventilation
Switching on
Press button once for each ventilation
level.
Highest level if three bars are shown on the cli‐
mate control display.
The ventilation switches back by one level af‐
ter a short time.
Switching off
Press button and hold until bar display
on the climate control display goes
out.
Individual activation
Concept
A number of heating and cooling functions can
be automatically activated depending on the
external temperature.
General information
The external temperature at which the func‐
tions are to be automatically activated can be
set via iDrive.
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing functions can be automatically acti‐
vated:
▷ Seat heating.
Seite 92
Controls Settings
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ Heated steering wheel.
▷ Seat ventilation.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes after a stop, the functions are activated
automatically with the levels that were last se‐
lected.
Functional requirements
▷ The safety belt of the corresponding seat
is buckled.
▷ The external temperature exceeds or falls
below the set external temperature in the
first 2 minutes after drive-ready state has
been switched on.
▷ The external temperature exceeds or falls
below the set external temperature after
the individual activation settings have been
changed.
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. Select a menu item:
▷ "Steering wheel heating"
▷ "Seat heating"
▷ "Seat and steering wheel heating"
▷ "Seat climate control"
▷ "Seat climate / steer. wheel heating"
5. Select desired seat.
6. Select the menu item of the desired func‐
tion.
7. Set the external temperature at which the
function is to be activated.
8. Set the desired level.
Seite 93
Settings Controls
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
The right place for children
Safety information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, for instance due to the fol‐
lowing actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Always transport children in the rear
seat
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
Transport children younger than 13 years of
age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear
seat in suitable child restraint systems de‐
signed for the age, weight and size of the child.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
weight and size.
Safety information
WARNING
The safety belt cannot be fastened cor‐
rectly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm
without suitable additional child restraint sys‐
tems. The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened safety belt can cause additional inju‐
ries, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Secure chil‐
dren shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable
child restraint systems.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
General information
Before using a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,
knee, and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated. Automatic deactivation of
front-seat passenger airbags, refer to
page 142.
Safety information
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.◀
Seite 94
Controls Transporting children safely
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Installing child restraint
systems
General information
Pay attention to the information, operating and
safety information of the child restraint system
manufacturer when selecting, installing and
using child restraint systems.
Safety information
WARNING
The protective effect of damaged child
restraint systems or of child restraint systems
exposed to an accident and their fastening
systems can be limited or lost. A child can
e.g.,not sufficiently restrained, for instance in
the event of an accident or braking and evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger
to life. Have damaged child restraint systems
or of child restraint systems exposed to an ac‐
cident and their fastening systems checked
and possibly replaced by the dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged or
locked. If possible, adjust the height of the
head restraints or remove them.◀
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.◀
After installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
automatically, refer to page 142.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go and, if possible, bring it up to medium
height. This seat position and height ensures
the best possible position for the belt and of‐
fers optimal protection in the event of an acci‐
dent.
If the upper anchor of the safety belt is located
in front of the belt guide of the child seat, move
the front passenger seat carefully forward until
the best possible belt guide position is
reached.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint system in the front passenger
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position.
Seite 95
Transporting children safely Controls
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Child seat security
The safety belts in the rear and the front pas‐
senger safety belt can be permanently locked
to fasten child restraint systems.
Locking the safety belt
1.
Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull
it tight against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1.
Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐
dren.
Pay attention to the information, operating and
safety information of the child restraint system
manufacturer when selecting, installing and
using LATCH child restraint fixing systems.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
General information
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Safety information
WARNING
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tems are not correctly engaged, the protective
effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tem can be limited. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the lower an‐
chors are securely engaged and that the
LATCH child restraint fixing system fits se‐
curely against the backrest.◀
Position
Symbol Meaning
The corresponding symbol
shows the mounts for the
lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower an‐
chors are marked with a pair, 2,
of LATCH symbols.
For vehicles equipped with a
middle seat:
It is not recommended to use
the inner lower anchors of
standard outer LATCH posi‐
tions to fasten a child restraint
system on the middle seat. Use
the vehicle safety belt instead
for the middle seat.
Before installing LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
child restraint system.
Seite 96
Controls Transporting children safely
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Assembly of LATCH child restraint
fixing systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
turer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint systems with tether
strap
Safety information
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the protec‐
tive effect can be reduced. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not guided across sharp edges and without
twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀
WARNING
If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro‐
tective effect of the child restraint system is
limited or there is none. In particular situations,
for instance braking maneuvers or in case of an
accident, the rear backrest can fold forward.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
sure that the rear backrests are locked.◀
NOTE
The anchors for the upper retaining
straps of child restraint systems are only pro‐
vided for these retaining straps. When other
objects are mounted, the anchors can be dam‐
aged. There is a risk of damage to property.
Only mount child restraint systems to the up‐
per retaining straps.◀
Anchors
The respective symbol shows the an‐
chor for the upper retaining strap.
Seats with an upper top tether are
marked with this symbol. It can be found on
the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
Routing the retaining strap
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the anchor
1.
Raise the head restraint, if needed.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.
3. If there is a retaining strap, run it between
the backrest and the cargo cover.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the anchor.
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
Locking the doors and
windows in the rear
General information
In certain situations it may be advisable to se‐
cure the rear doors and windows, for instance
when transporting children.
Seite 97
Transporting children safely Controls
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press button on the driver's door.
This locks various functions so that they can‐
not be operated from the rear. Safety switch,
refer to page 79.
Seite 98
Controls Transporting children safely
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Start/Stop button
Concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches drive-ready state on or
off, refer to page 21.
Steptronic transmission: the
drive-ready state is switched on
when you depress the brake pedal while press‐
ing the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches
drive-ready state back off and standby state,
refer to page 21, is switched back on.
Drive-ready state
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain pollutants which are colorless and odor‐
less. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.◀
NOTE
In the case of repeated starting attempts
or repeated starting in quick succession, the
fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned.
The catalytic converter can overheat. There is
a risk of damage to property. Avoid repeated
starting in quick succession.◀
Switching on drive-ready state
Steptronic transmission
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the in‐
strument cluster light up for a varied length of
time.
Diesel engine
If the engine is cold and temperatures are be‐
low approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃, the start process may
be delayed somewhat due to automatic pre‐
heating.
Seite 99
Driving Controls
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
A Check Control message with yellow
indicator light is displayed.
Display in the instrument cluster
When drive-ready state is switched on, the
tachometer shows the current engine speed.
Switching off drive-ready state
Steptronic transmission
1. Engage selector lever position P with the
vehicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function
Concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, for instance in traffic congestion or at
traffic lights. Drive-ready state remains
switched on. The engine starts automatically
for driving off.
General information
After each engine start using the Start/Stop
button, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready.
The function is activated from speeds of ap‐
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h.
Depending on the selected driving mode, refer
to page 115, the system is automatically acti‐
vated or deactivated.
Engine stop
Functional requirements
Steptronic transmission
The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
ing a stop under the following conditions:
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the
vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held
by Automatic Hold.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
Steptronic transmission: manual
engine stop
If the engine was not switched off automati‐
cally when the vehicle stopped, the engine can
be switched off manually:
▷ Press the brake pedal forcefully again from
the current pedal position.
▷ Engage selector lever position P.
If all functional preconditions are fulfilled, the
engine switches off.
Air conditioner when the engine is
switched off
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
General information
The display in the tachometer
indicates that the Auto Start/
Stop function is ready for an Au‐
tomatic engine start.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met.
Seite 100
Controls Driving
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Total time with switched-off engine
ECO PRO, refer to page 252,
driving mode: if the vehicle is
equipped accordingly, the total
time that the engine has been
switched off using the Auto
Start/Stop function is displayed on an auto‐
matic engine stop.
The total time is automatically reset every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Functional limitations
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷ In case of a steep downhill grade.
▷ Brake not engaged strongly enough.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated
or cooled to the required level.
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensa‐
tion when the automatic climate control is
switched on.
▷ Engine or other parts not at operating tem‐
perature.
▷ Engine cooling is required.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ At higher elevations.
▷ The hood is unlocked.
▷ HDC Hill Descent Control is activated.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever po‐
sition in N or R.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Starting the engine
Functional requirements
Steptronic transmission
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing preconditions:
▷ By releasing the brake pedal.
▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: press
the accelerator pedal.
Driving away
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met:
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied
length of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
System limits
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior
when the air conditioning is switched on.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
the heating is switched on.
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensa‐
tion when the automatic climate control is
switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐
lector lever position D to N or R.
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐
lector lever position P to N, D or R.
Seite 101
Driving Controls
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Start of an oil level measurement.
Intelligent Auto Start/Stop function
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
country-specific version, the vehicle features a
variety of sensors for assessing the traffic sit‐
uation. The Intelligent Auto Start/Stop function
uses this information to adapt to various traffic
situations in a proactive manner.
For instance, this applies to the following sit‐
uations:
▷ If a situation is detected in which the stop‐
ping time is expected to be very short, the
engine is not switched off automatically. A
message appears on the Control Display,
depending on the situation.
▷ If a situation is detected in which the vehi‐
cle needs to drive off immediately, the en‐
gine is started automatically.
The function may be restricted if the naviga‐
tion data is invalid, outdated or not available,
for example.
Activating/deactivating the system
manually
Concept
The engine is not automatically switched off.
The engine is started during an automatic en‐
gine stop.
Using the button
Press button.
Steptronic transmission: via selector
lever position
The Auto Start/Stop function is also deacti‐
vated in selector lever position M/S.
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
The Auto Start/Stop function is also deacti‐
vated in SPORT driving mode of the Driving
Dynamics Control.
Display
▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is
activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
General information
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, for instance
when leaving it.
Steptronic transmission
1.
Press the Start/Stop button.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged
automatically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Automatic deactivation
General information
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐
sons, for instance if no driver is detected.
Seite 102
Controls Driving
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the system checked by
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
Concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi‐
cle from rolling when it is parked.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, for instance due to the fol‐
lowing actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
Parking brake
Setting
With a stationary vehicle
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates red. The parking
brake is set.
While driving
To use as emergency brake while driving:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the switch is being pulled.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates red, a signal sounds,
and the brake lights illuminate.
A Check Control message is displayed.
If the vehicle is slowed down to a speed of ap‐
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake is set.
Seite 103
Driving Controls
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Releasing
Releasing manually
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
2.
Steptronic transmission: press the
switch while the brake is pressed or selec‐
tor lever position P is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Automatic release
The parking brake is released automatically
when you drive away.
The LED and indicator light go out.
Automatic Hold
Concept
This system assists the driver by automatically
setting and releasing the brake, such as when
moving in stop-and-go traffic.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary.
On uphill grades the system prevents the vehi‐
cle from rolling backward when driving offf.
General information
Under the following conditions, the parking
brake is automatically engaged:
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ The driver's door is opened while the vehi‐
cle is stationary.
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a stand‐
still using the parking brake.
Display
The indicator light changes from green
to red.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, for instance due to the fol‐
lowing actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
NOTE
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic
Hold engages the parking brake and prevents
the vehicle from rolling in a vehicle wash.
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐
vate Automatic Hold prior to entering the vehi‐
cle wash.◀
Seite 104
Controls Driving
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Overview
Automatic Hold
Establishing function readiness of
Automatic Hold
1.
Switch on drive-ready state.
2.
Press button.
The LED lights up.
The indicator light lights up green.
Automatic Hold is functional.
After every new vehicle start, the last
selected setting is active.
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle
Function readiness is established and the driv‐
er's door is closed.
After stepping on the brake pedal, for instance
when stopping at a traffic light, the vehicle is
automatically secured against rolling.
The indicator light lights up green.
Driving away
Step on the accelerator pedal to drive off.
The brake is released automatically and the in‐
dicator light is no longer illuminated.
Activating the parking brake
automatically
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle
is exited.
The indicator light changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set automatically, if
the drive-ready state is switched off, while the
vehicle is coasting to a halt. Automatic Hold is
deactivated.
Switching function readiness off
Press button.
The LED goes out.
The indicator light goes out.
Automatic Hold is switched off.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press additionally on the brake pedal, when
switching off.
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake:
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in‐
stance with a wheel chock, after existing the
vehicle.
After a power failure
To reestablish parking brake functionality after
a power failure:
1.
Switch on standby state.
2.
Pull the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is
set and then push.
This process may take a few seconds. Any
sounds associated with this are normal.
Seite 105
Driving Controls
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
The indicator light is no longer illumi‐
nated as soon as the parking brake is
ready for operation again.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlight flasher
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights
on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Using turn signals
Press the lever past the resistance point.
Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
High beams, headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
them to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
Seite 106
Controls Driving
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Switching on
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Rain sensor, position 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
When travel is interrupted with the wiper sys‐
tem switched on: when travel continues, the
wipers resume at their previous speed.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down.
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
reaches its standard position.
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
standard position.
The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released.
Rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di‐
rectly in front of the interior mirror.
Safety information
NOTE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle
washes. There is a risk of damage to property.
Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.◀
Activating
Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐
tion, arrow 1.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
Deactivating
Press the lever back into the standard position.
Seite 107
Driving Controls
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the sensitivity
of the rain sensor.
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.
Downward: low rains sensor sensitivity.
Windshield washer system
Safety information
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use
the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.◀
NOTE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
use the washer system when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty.◀
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
cally heated while standby state is switched
on.
Rear window wiper
Overview
Switching on the rear window wiper
Turn the outer switch upward.
▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0.
▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse
gear is engaged, the system switches to
continuous operation.
Clean the rear window
Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.
▷ In resting position: turn the switch down‐
ward, arrow 3. The switch automatically re‐
turns to its idle position when released.
▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch fur‐
ther, arrow 2. The switch automatically re‐
turns to its interval position when released.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The fold-out position enables the wipers to be
folded away from the windshield.
Seite 108
Controls Driving
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
General information
Important, for instance when changing the
wiper blades or when folding out under frosty
conditions.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Folding away the wipers
1.
Switch on standby state.
2. Press and hold the wiper level down, until
the wipers stop in a close to vertical posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the
windshield.
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1.
Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
shield.
2. Switch on standby state and press and
hold the wiper lever down again.
3. Wipers return to their resting position and
are ready again for operation.
Washer fluid
General information
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
ervoir.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
washer concentrate containing antifreeze can
be used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain
harmful substances and are flammable. There
is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the in‐
structions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐
Seite 109
Driving Controls
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐
erating materials out of reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen‐
trate or the equivalent is recommended.◀
WARNING
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on
contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐
ervoir.◀
NOTE
Silicon-containing additives in the
washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on
the windows can lead to damage to the wash‐
ing system. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not add silicon-containing additives to
the washer fluid.◀
NOTE
Mixing different windshield washer con‐
centrates or antifreeze can damage the wash‐
ing system. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not mix different windshield washer
concentrates or antifreeze. Follow the informa‐
tion and mixing ratios provided on the contain‐
ers.◀
Overview
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐
gine compartment.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer con‐
centrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead
to incorrect readings at temperatures below
+5 ℉/-15 ℃.
Steptronic transmission
Concept
The Steptronic transmission combines the
functions of an automatic transmission with
the possibility of manual shifting, if needed.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.◀
Seite 110
Controls Driving
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Selector lever positions
Drive mode D
Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐
ation. All gears for forward travel are activated
automatically.
Reverse R
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Neutral N
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without
power, for instance in vehicle washes, refer to
page 112, in selector lever position N.
Parking position P
Selector lever position, for instance for parking
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive
wheels in selector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally in situations such as the following:
▷ After the drive-ready state is switched off
and selector lever position R, D or M/S is
engaged.
▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the
driver's door is opened, and the brake
pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is
stationary and selector lever position D,
M/S or R is engaged.
▷ After the standby state has been switched
off when selector lever position N is en‐
gaged.
Engaging selector lever positions
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Functional requirements
Only when the drive-ready state is switched on
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible
to change from selector lever position P to an‐
other selector lever position.
Engaging selector lever position D, N,
R
A selector lever lock prevents the following
faulty operation:
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever
position R.
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever
position P into another selector lever posi‐
tion.
1. Press and hold the button to release the
selector lever lock.
2. With the driver's safety belt fastened,
briefly push the selector lever in the de‐
sired direction, past a resistance point, if
needed. The selector lever automatically
returns to the center position when re‐
leased.
Seite 111
Driving Controls
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Engaging selector lever position P
Press button P.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
General information
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
its own power for a short distance, for instance
in a vehicle wash, or be pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N
1.
Switch on drive-ready state while pressing
on the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold, re‐
fer to page 104.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Touch the selector lever lock and engage
selector lever position N.
6. Switch off drive-ready state.
In this way, standby state remains
switched on, and a Check Control mes‐
sage is displayed.
The vehicle may roll.
NOTE
Selector lever position P is automatically
engaged when standby state is switched off.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
switch standby state off in vehicle washes.◀
Irrespective of standby state, the selector lever
position P is automatically engaged after ap‐
prox. 35 minutes.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to
change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
needed, refer to page 114.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance.
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re‐
sistance point at the full throttle position.
Sport program M/S
Concept
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for a sportier driv‐
ing style. The transmission, for instance shifts
up later and the shifting times are shorter.
Activating the sport program
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐
tor lever position D.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, for instance S1.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
vated.
Ending the Sport program
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Seite 112
Controls Driving
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Manual mode M/S
Concept
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual
mode.
Activating manual mode
1. Press the selector lever to the left out of
selector lever position D, arrow 1.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward, arrows 2.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, for instance M1.
Shifting
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
wards.
The transmission continues shifting automati‐
cally in certain situations, for instance when
speed limits are reached.
Steptronic Sport transmission:
prevent automatic upshifting in M/S
manual mode
If driving mode SPORT, refer to page 116, is
selected, the Steptronic Sport transmission
does not automatically upshift in M/S manual
mode once the maximum speed is reached.
Depending on the BMW M drive configuration,
this function is active independently of the
driving mode.
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐
down.
Ending the manual mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
Concept
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
General information
Shifting
The vehicle only shifts at suitable engine and
road speeds.
Short-term manual mode
In selector lever position D, actuating a shift
paddle switches into manual mode tempora‐
rily.
After conservative driving in manual mode
without acceleration or shifting via the shift
paddles for a certain amount of time, the trans‐
mission switches back to automatic mode.
It is possible to switch into automatic mode as
follows:
▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift
paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.
Continuous manual mode
In selector lever position S, actuating a shift
paddle switches into manual mode perma‐
nently.
Seite 113
Driving Controls
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Steptronic Sport transmission
With the appropriate transmission version, the
lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐
taneously activating kickdown and operating
the left shift paddles. This is not possible in
short-term manual mode.
Shifting
▷ To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.
▷ To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
▷ The lowest possible gear can be selected
by pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is
displayed, for example P.
Electronic unlocking of the
transmission lock
General information
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
maneuver vehicle from a danger area.
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the
engine.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll‐
ing away.
Engaging selector lever position N
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter
must audibly start. Hold the Start/Stop but‐
ton pressed.
3. With your free hand, press the button on
the selector lever, arrow 1, and press the
selector lever into selector lever position N
and hold, arrow N, until selector lever posi‐
tion N is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.
A Check Control message is displayed.
4. Release Start/Stop button and selector
lever.
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter
stops.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own.
For additional information, see the chapter on
tow-starting and towing, refer to page 319.
Launch Control
Concept
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction under dry sur‐
rounding conditions.
General information
The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents
a very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 242, period.
Seite 114
Controls Driving
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Do not steer the steering wheel when driving
off with Launch Control.
Functional requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
at operating temperature. The engine is at op‐
erating temperature after an uninterrupted trip
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
Start with launch control
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
2.
Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up.
3. Engage selector lever position S.
4. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
5. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full
throttle position, kickdown.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
6. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Repeated use during a trip
After Launch Control has been used, the trans‐
mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes
before Launch Control can be used again.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding
conditions, when used again.
After using Launch Control
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control again as soon as possi‐
ble.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
Driving Dynamics Control
Concept
The Driving Dynamics Control influences the
driving dynamics properties of the vehicle. The
vehicle can be adjusted depending on the sit‐
uation using various driving modes.
General information
The following systems are affected, for in‐
stance:
▷ Engine characteristics.
▷ Steptronic transmission.
▷ Dynamic Damping Control.
▷ Steering.
▷ Adaptive M chassis.
▷ Display in the instrument cluster.
▷ Cruise control.
When drive-ready state is switched on, the
COMFORT driving mode is selected automati‐
cally.
Overview
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selected driving mode is
displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Seite 115
Driving Controls
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Driving modes
Button Driving
mode
Configuration
SPORT
SPORT
PLUS
INDIVIDUAL
COMFORT
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
ADAPTIVE
Driving modes in detail
COMFORT
Concept
Balanced tuning between dynamic and con‐
sumption-optimized driving.
Switching on
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
SPORT
Concept
Dynamic tuning for higher agility.
Switching on
Press button repeatedly until SPORT
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
SPORT INDIVIDUAL
Concept
Individual settings can be adjusted in the
SPORT INDIVIDUAL driving mode.
Configuration
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving Experience Control"
4. "Configure SPORT INDIVIDUAL"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to the standard
settings:
"Reset to SPORT STANDARD".
SPORT PLUS
Concept
Dynamic tuning for maximum agility with opti‐
mized chassis and suspension and adjusted
drive.
Switching on
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT PLUS is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
ECO PRO
Concept
Consumption-optimized tuning.
Switching on
Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
Concept
Individual settings can be adjusted in the ECO
PRO INDIVIDUAL driving mode.
Seite 116
Controls Driving
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Configuration
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving Experience Control"
4. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
settings:
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD".
ADAPTIVE
Concept
Comfort-oriented driving mode, whose tuning
is automatically modified to the driving situa‐
tion and driving style.
If the navigation system is active, upcoming
road sections are considered.
The function may be restricted if the naviga‐
tion data is invalid, outdated or not available,
for example.
Switching on
Press button. ADAPTIVE is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
INDIVIDUAL configuration
General information
The individual configuration of the driving
mode is stored for the active driver profile. The
last set configuration is activated directly when
the driving mode is called up again.
Activating configuration of the driving
mode
Press button for the desired driving mode sev‐
eral times.
Seite 117
Driving Controls
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Displays
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Instrument cluster
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, it may be
possible to deactivate the display change in
the instrument cluster via iDrive.
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster
may differ from the illustrations in this Owner's
Manual.
Overview
1 Fuel gauge 122
Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
range 124
2 Speedometer
3 Time 123
External temperature 123
Driver assistance system displays
Service requirements 124
4 Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
tachometer 123
Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
ECO PRO displays 252
5 Engine temperature 123
6 Navigation display.
Transmission display
Status, Driving Dynamics Control 115
7 Check Control 119
Onboard Computer 128
8 Driver assistance system displays
Speed Limit Info 125
Instrument cluster without enhanced fea‐
tures: range 124
9 Reset miles 128
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features: setting the operating mode
Concept
Depending on the equipment, the instrument
cluster can be set to three different operating
modes in addition to the driving mode.
Settings
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. Select the desired setting.
▷ "STANDARD": all displays on the in‐
strument cluster are active.
Seite 118
Controls Displays
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ "REDUCED" all displays on the instru‐
ment cluster are reduced to the essen‐
tial.
▷ "INDIVIDUAL": all displays on the in‐
strument cluster are active. Individual
displays can be individually selected.
Configuring INDIVIDUAL
▷ "Driving mode display": when the driving
mode is switched into ECO PRO or
SPORT, the instrument cluster automati‐
cally switches into the respective view.
▷ "Speed limit exceeded": if the speed rec‐
ognized by Speed Limit Info is exceeded,
the exceeded range is marked red in the
speedometer.
▷ Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
"Magnifier function": the current speed is
shown enlarged in the speedometer.
Instrument cluster without enhanced
features: selecting displays in the
instrument cluster
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Road signs": display Speed Limit Info.
Check Control
Concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
in the monitored systems.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights and
SMS text messages in the instrument cluster
and, if applicable, in the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and
an SMS text message may appear on the Con‐
trol Display.
Indicator/warning lights
Concept
Indicator/warning lights in the instrument clus‐
ter display the status of some functions in the
vehicle and indicate when a malfunction is
present in the monitored systems.
General information
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when
drive-ready state is switched on.
Red lights
Safety belt reminder
Indicator light flashes or is illuminated:
safety belt on the driver or passenger
side is not buckled. The safety belt re‐
minder can also be activated if objects are
placed on the front passenger seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner are
not working.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
Seite 119
Displays Controls
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Release the parking brake, refer to page 104.
Brake system
Braking system impaired. Continue to
drive moderately.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Braking force boost may not be work‐
ing. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the lon‐
ger braking distance into account.
Have the system immediately checked
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The indicator light flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive and braking forces. The
vehicle is stabilized. Reduce speed and
modify your driving style to the driving circum‐
stances.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐
tioned.
Have the system immediately checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
DSC, refer to page 168.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
Control is activated
DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated.
DSC, refer to page 168, and DTC, refer
to page 169.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cau‐
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐
neuvers.
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 288.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The indicator light lights up: the Tire
Pressure Monitor reports a low tire in‐
flation pressure or a flat tire. Follow the
information in the Check Control message.
The indicator light flashes and then continu‐
ously lights up: no flat tire or loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure can be detected.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
▷ In the case of tires with special approval:
TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 281.
Steering system
Steering system may not be working.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 120
Controls Displays
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
page 306.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed.
Turn signal, refer to page 106.
Parking lights, headlight
Parking lights or headlights are
switched on.
Parking light/low beams, automatic
headlight control, refer to page 134.
Lane departure warning
The indicator light lights up: the system
is activated. At least one lane marking
was detected and warnings can be is‐
sued.
Lane departure warning, refer to page 154.
Front fog lights
Front fog lights are switched on.
Front fog lights, refer to page 138.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are switched on and off
automatically depending on the traffic
situation.
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 136.
Automatic Hold
Automatic Hold is activated. The vehi‐
cle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary.
Automatic Hold, refer to page 104.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are switched on.
High beams, refer to page 106.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Continuous display
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions
Seite 121
Displays Controls
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
occur at once, the messages are displayed
consecutively.
The messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed
again automatically.
Temporary display
Some Check Control messages are hidden au‐
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. The
Check Control messages are stored and can
be displayed again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the SMS text message.
Display
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.
SMS text messages
SMS text messages in combination with a
symbol in the instrument cluster explain a
Check Control message and the meaning of
the indicator/warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages
Additional information, such as the reason for
an error or malfunction or the required action,
can be called up via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Further help
Depending on the Check Control message,
further help can be selected.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the desired text message.
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Call BMW Accident Assistance"
Contact BMW Roadside Assistance.
▷ "Service request"
Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
▷ "BMW Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about
the Check Control message in the
Integrated Owner's Manual.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after drive-ready state is
switched off.
Fuel gauge
Concept
The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis‐
played.
General information
Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to
vary.
Information on refueling, refer to page 260.
Seite 122
Controls Displays
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Instrument cluster without enhanced
features: display
An arrow beside the fuel pump
symbol shows which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features: display
An arrow beside the fuel pump
symbol shows which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
The current range is displayed
as numerical value.
Indicator light In the instrument
cluster
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to
protect the engine.
Standby state and drive-
ready state
The letters OFF in the tachome‐
ter indicate that drive-ready
state is switched off and
standby state is switched on.
The letters READY in the tach‐
ometer indicate that the Auto
Start/Stop function is ready to
start the engine automatically.
For further information, see Idle state, standby
state, and drive-ready state, refer to page 21.
Engine temperature
Display
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate engine
and vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the pointer is in the
middle or in the lower half of
the temperature display.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of
the temperature range. In addition, a Check
Control message is displayed.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 303.
Indicator light In the instrument
cluster
A red indicator light is displayed.
External temperature
General information
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a
signal sounds.
A Check Control message is displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Safety information
WARNING
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on
bridges or shady sections of road. There is a
risk of an accident. Modify your driving style to
the weather conditions at low temperatures.◀
Time
The time is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Seite 123
Displays Controls
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Setting the time and time format, refer to
page 39.
Range
Concept
The range indicates the distance that can still
be covered with the current fuel level.
General information
The estimated range available with the remain‐
ing fuel is permanently displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
With a low remaining range, a Check Control
message is briefly displayed. With a dynamic
driving style, for instance taking curves ag‐
gressively, the engine function is not always
ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Safety information
NOTE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property. Refuel promptly.◀
Instrument cluster without enhanced
features: display
The current range is displayed
as numerical value at the bottom
of the speedometer.
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features: display
The current range is displayed
as numerical value next to the
fuel gauge.
Service requirements
Concept
The function displays the service requirements
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
General information
After switching on drive-ready state, the in‐
strument cluster briefly displays available driv‐
ing distance or time to the next scheduled
maintenance.
A service advisor can read out the current
service requirements from your remote con‐
trol.
Some information on service requirements can
also be shown on the BMW display key.
Display
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the type of service re‐
quired may be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Seite 124
Controls Displays
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Symbols
Sym‐
bols
Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for scheduled mainte‐
nance or a legally mandated inspec‐
tion is approaching.
The service deadline has already
passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐
spections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Select the desired setting.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections is automatically
transmitted to your dealer’s service center be‐
fore your vehicle is due for service.
You can check when your dealer’s service cen‐
ter was notified.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Teleservice Call"
Gear shift indicator
Concept
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
cient gear for the current driving situation.
General information
Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐
try-specific version, the gear shift indicator is
active in the manual mode of the Steptronic
transmission and with manual transmission.
Steptronic transmission: displaying
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed.
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info
Concept
Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum
permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
General information
The camera in the area of the interior mirror
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as
well as variable overhead sign posts.
Traffic signs with extra symbols are considered
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.
The traffic sign will then be either displayed or
ignored depending on the situation.
Seite 125
Displays Controls
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
The system takes into account the information
stored in the navigation system and also dis‐
plays speed limits present on routes without
signs.
Speed limits when towing a trailer are not
shown.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
Overview
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Displaying Speed Limit Info
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed
Limit Info is displayed via the operating mode
of the instrument cluster or via iDrive.
Display via operating mode of the
instrument cluster
The Speed Limit Info displays are shown or
hidden via the operating mode of the instru‐
ment cluster.
The Speed Limit Info is displayed in the follow‐
ing operating modes: "STANDARD" or
"INDIVIDUAL"
Speed Limit Info is not displayed in the follow‐
ing operating mode: "REDUCED"
Adjusting the operating mode of the instru‐
ment cluster, refer to page 118.
Display via iDrive
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Road signs"
Display
General information
Speed Limit Info is displayed in the instrument
cluster and, if applicable, in the Head-up Dis‐
play.
Speed Limit Info
Current speed limit.
Speed Limit Info not available.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
Seite 126
Controls Displays
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been
temporarily switched off due to excessively
high temperatures.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits or road data stored in the
navigation system are incorrect.
▷ If the speed limits vary with the time of day
and the day of the week.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in road routing.
▷ In case of electronic traffic signs.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with traffic
signs applied to them.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road
are detected.
▷ In the presence of country-specific signs
and road configurations.
Selection lists
General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following can be displayed or operated using
the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steer‐
ing wheel as well as the displays in the instru‐
ment cluster and the Head-up Display:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.
Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
list.
1.
Turn the thumbwheel and select the de‐
sired setting.
2. Press the thumbwheel.
Display
Depending on the equipment version, the list
in the instrument cluster may differ from the il‐
lustration.
Seite 127
Displays Controls
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Onboard Computer in the
instrument cluster
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different ve‐
hicle data in the instrument cluster, such as
average values.
Calling up information
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Information is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter. Pressing the button repeatedly displays
additional information.
Information at a glance
The following information can be displayed on
the Onboard Computer:
▷ Miles and trip miles.
▷ Time of arrival and distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Fuel consumption display.
▷ Average fuel consumption and average
speed.
▷ Compass display for the driving direction.
Adjusting information for Onboard
Computer
For some information of the Onboard Com‐
puter, it is possible to set whether it can be
called up in the instrument cluster.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Onboard info"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Information in detail
Odometer and trip odometer
Displaying/resetting miles
▷ Press the knob to display
the trip miles.
When the drive-ready state
is switched off, miles and
trip miles are displayed.
▷ Keep the knob pressed down to reset the
trip miles.
Display
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Seite 128
Controls Displays
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Time of arrival and distance to
destination
General information
The estimated time of arrival and the distance
remaining to the destination are displayed if a
destination is entered in the navigation system
before the trip is started.
Display
▷ Time of arrival, arrow 1.
▷ Distance to destination, arrow 2.
Fuel consumption display
Concept
During energy recovery, the kinetic energy of
the vehicle is converted into electric energy
during coasting. The vehicle battery is partially
charged and fuel consumption can be reduced.
The current fuel consumption displays the cur‐
rent consumption of fuel. Check whether you
are currently driving in an efficient and environ‐
mentally-friendly manner.
General information
Energy recovery and current fuel consumption
can be displayed as bar displays in the On‐
board Computer.
Display
▷ Energy recovery, arrow 1.
▷ Average fuel consumption, arrow 2.
▷ Current fuel consumption, arrow 3.
Average speed and average fuel
consumption
General information
Average speed and average fuel consumption
are calculated for the distance traveled since
the last reset in the Onboard Computer.
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped are not included in
the calculation of the average speed.
Resetting average values
Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
Seite 129
Displays Controls
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Display
▷ Average speed, arrow 1.
▷ Average fuel consumption, arrow 2.
Onboard Computer on the
Control Display
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different ve‐
hicle data on the Control Display, such as aver‐
age values.
General information
Two types of Onboard Computers are availa‐
ble on the Control Display:
▷ "Onboard info": average values, such as
the fuel consumption, are displayed. The
values can be reset individually.
▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an
overview of a certain distance and can be
reset as often as necessary.
Calling up the Onboard Computer or
trip computer
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the Onboard Computer
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info"
4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
5. "OK"
Resetting the trip computer
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip computer"
4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
▷ "Reset": all values are reset.
▷ "Automatic reset": all values are
reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle
has come to a standstill.
5. If necessary, "OK"
Sport displays
General information
On the Control Display, the current values for
performance and torque can be displayed if
the vehicle is appropriately equipped.
Displays
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Sport displays"
Speed warning
Concept
A speed limit can be set that when reached will
cause a warning to be issued.
Seite 130
Controls Displays
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
General information
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
exceeds the set speed limit again, after it has
dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
speed warning
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Warning at:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed
is displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
Activating/deactivating the speed
warning
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Speed warning"
5. Press the Controller.
Setting your current speed as the
speed warning
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Select current speed"
5. Press the Controller.
Vehicle status
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per‐
formed for several systems.
Opening the vehicle status
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
Information at a glance
▷ "Flat Tire Monitor": Status of the Flat
Tire Monitor, refer to page 288.
▷ "Tire Pressure Monitor": Status of the
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 281.
▷ "Engine oil level": Electronic engine
oil level check, refer to page 299.
▷ "Diesel exhaust fluid": BMW Advanced
Diesel, refer to page 263.
▷ "Check Control": Check Control mes‐
sages are stored in the background and
can be displayed on the Control Display.
Displaying stored Check Control mes‐
sages, refer to page 122.
▷ "Service required": Displaying serv‐
ice requirements, refer to page 124.
▷ "Teleservice Call": service request.
Head-up Display
Concept
This system projects important information
into the driver's field of vision, for instance the
speed.
The driver can get information without averting
his or her eyes from the road.
General information
Read the information for cleaning the Head-up
Display, refer to page 325.
Seite 131
Displays Controls
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Overview
Switching on/off
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Head-Up Display"
Display
Overview
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display:
▷ Speed.
▷ Navigation system.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster.
▷ Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
Selecting the view
Various views are available for the Head-up
Display.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. Select the desired setting.
▷ "STANDARD": all displays in the Head-
up Display are active.
▷ "REDUCED": the displays in the Head-
up Display are reduced to the mini‐
mum.
▷ "INDIVIDUAL": all displays in the Head-
up Display are active. Individual dis‐
plays such as Check Control messages
can be selected individually.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "INDIVIDUAL"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
Seite 132
Controls Displays
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be ad‐
ditionally influenced using the instrument light‐
ing.
Adjusting the height
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Height"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height
is reached.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
The height of the Head-up Display can also be
stored using the memory function, refer to
page 90.
Setting the rotation
The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐
tated around its own axis.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Rotation"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is selected.
7. Press the Controller.
Visibility of the display
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by the following factors:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, have the basic set‐
tings checked by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double im‐
ages from being generated.
For this reason, it is strongly suggested to
have the special windshield replaced by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop, if necessary.
Seite 133
Displays Controls
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Lights
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Overview
Switches in the vehicle
The light switch element is located next to the
steering wheel.
Symbol Function
Front fog lights.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Automatic headlight control.
Adaptive light functions.
Symbol Function
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Right roadside parking light.
Left roadside parking light.
Parking lights, low beams
and roadside parking lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting
is automatically switched off.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery
and it would then be impossible to switch on
drive-ready state.
Low beams
Position of switch:
The low beams illuminate when drive-ready
state is switched on.
Roadside parking lights
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road‐
side parking light can be switched on.
Seite 134
Controls Lights
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Button Function
Right roadside parking light on/off.
Left roadside parking light on/off.
Welcome lights and
headlight courtesy delay
feature
Welcome lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, the exterior
lighting of the vehicle can be set individually.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch: ,
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Welcome lights"
Individual light functions are switched
on for a limited time.
▷ "LED light carpet"
The area next to the vehicle is illumi‐
nated for a limited time.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
General information
The low beams stay lit for a particular time if
the high beams are switched on after standby
state is switched on.
Setting the duration
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Select the desired setting.
Automatic headlight control
Concept
The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
matically depending on the ambient bright‐
ness, for instance in tunnels, in twilight or if
there is precipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
Activating
Position of switch:
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
illuminated when the low beams are switched
on.
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot serve
as a substitute for your personal judgment of
lighting conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks un‐
der these conditions, you should always switch
on the lights manually.
Daytime running lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
Seite 135
Lights Controls
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
The daytime running lights light up when
drive-ready state is switched on. After drive-
ready state is switched off, the parking lights
light up in position .
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Adaptive light functions
Concept
Adaptive light functions enable dynamic illumi‐
nation of the roadway.
General information
The adaptive light functions may consist of
one system or multiple systems, depending on
the equipment version:
▷ Adaptive Light Control, refer to page 136.
▷ Cornering light, refer to page 136.
Activating
Position of switch:
The adaptive light functions are active when
the drive-ready state is switched on.
Adaptive Light Control
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlight follows
the course of the road.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the oppo‐
site lane when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Cornering light
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
roads or when turning, an additional, cornering
light is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
certain speed.
The cornering light is automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights
may be automatically switched on regardless
of the steering angle.
Adaptive headlight range
control
The adaptive headlight range control compen‐
sates for acceleration and braking operations
in order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to
achieve optimum illumination of the roadway.
High-beam Assistant
Concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
participants early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depending
on the traffic situation.
General information
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high
beams are switched on, whenever the traffic
situation allows. In the low speed range, the
high beams are not switched on by the system.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, for instance in towns
and cities.
Seite 136
Controls Lights
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
The high beams can be switched on and off at
any time as usual.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch:
Press and hold button on signal lever.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low
beams are switched on.
The headlights are automatically switched be‐
tween low beams and high beams.
The blue indicator light in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when
manually switching the high beams on and off,
refer to page 106.
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press
the button on the turn signal lever.
Sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant
General information
The sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant can
be adjusted.
Safety information
WARNING
If adjustments have been made or the
sensitivity has been modified, oncoming traffic
may be dazzled. There is a risk of an accident.
If adjustments have been made and the sensi‐
tivity has been modified, make sure that on‐
coming traffic is not dazzled. Switch off the
high beams manually if required.◀
Adjusting the sensitivity
Pull the turn signal lever for approxi‐
mately 10 seconds. The system responds
more sensitively.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Resetting the sensitivity
Pull the turn signal lever again for ap‐
prox. 10 seconds. The sensitivity of the high-
beam Assistant is reset to the factory settings.
System limits
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judgment of
when to use the high beams. In situation that
require this, therefore switch off manually.
The system is not fully functional in the follow‐
ing situations, and driver intervention may be
necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; or at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
coming traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Seite 137
Lights Controls
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Fog lights
Front fog lights
Concept
The front fog lights work alongside the low
beams to illuminate a wider area of the road‐
way.
Functional requirement
The low beams must be switched on before
switching on the front fog lights.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The green indicator light lights up if
the front fog lights are switched on.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to
page 135, is activated, the low beams will
come on automatically when you switch on the
front fog lights.
When the high beams or headlight flasher are
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on.
Instrument lighting
Functional requirement
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness.
Settings
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Interior lights
General information
Depending on the equipment version, interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient
lighting, and speaker lighting are automatically
controlled.
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Interior lights
Reading lights
Switching the interior lights on/off
Press button.
To switch off permanently: press the button
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle can
be switched on and off independently. The
button is located in the rear roofliner.
Switching the reading lights on/off
Press button.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
reading lights are located next to the interior
lights in the front and rear.
Seite 138
Controls Lights
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Ambient light
General information
Depending on the equipment version, lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's in‐
terior.
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive,
it will not be switched on when the vehicle is
unlocked.
Switching on/off
The ambient light is switched on when the ve‐
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Ambient lighting"
The selected setting is stored for the driver
profile currently used.
Selecting color scheme
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Color"
6. Select the desired setting.
Setting the brightness
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Select the desired setting.
Dimmed while driving
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Dimmed for night driving"
Some lights of the interior lighting are dimmed
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.
The selected setting is stored for the driver
profile currently used.
Seite 139
Lights Controls
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Safety
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbag
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and the
front passenger by responding to frontal im‐
pacts in which safety belts alone would not
provide adequate protection.
Side airbag
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
Seite 140
Controls Safety
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side
impact events.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Protective action
General information
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, for instance in less severe accidents or
rear-end collisions.
Information on optimum effect of the
airbags
WARNING
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐
ployment area of the airbags is impaired, the
airbag system cannot provide protection as in‐
tended and may cause additional injuries due
to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐
ger to life. Follow the information on achieving
the optimum protective effect of the airbag
system.◀
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐
gered.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
legs in the floor area and does not support
them on the dashboard.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
▷ There should be no additional persons, an‐
imals or objects between an airbag and a
person.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front
passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
not attach brackets or cables, for instance
for GPS devices or mobile phones.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or
modify them in any way.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not specifically suited for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
ties may affect the air bag system; contact
BMW Customer Relations for further informa‐
tion.
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Seite 141
Safety Controls
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
Safety information
WARNING
Individual components can be hot after
triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk
of injury. Do not touch individual compo‐
nents.◀
WARNING
Improperly executed work can lead to
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
tion, the airbag system might not trigger as in‐
tended despite the accident severity. There is
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Have the air‐
bag system checked, repaired, dismantled and
scrapped by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Display in the instrument cluster
When drive-ready state is switched on,
the warning light in the instrument
cluster lights up briefly and thereby in‐
dicates the function readiness of the entire air‐
bag system and the belt tensioners.
Malfunction
▷ Warning light does not come on
when drive-ready state is switched
on.
▷ The warning light lights up continuously.
Have the system checked.
Automatic deactivation of the front-
seat passenger airbags
Concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐
sistance.
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are activated or deactivated.
General information
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐
senger seat, refer to the safety information and
instructions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
Safety information
WARNING
To ensure the front-seat passenger air‐
bag function, the system must be able to de‐
tect whether a person is sitting in the front
passenger seat. The entire seat cushion area
must be used for this purpose. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the
front passenger keeps his or her feet in the
floor area.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the indicator light for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator light goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion.
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically determined to
be safe for use on the front passenger
seat.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐
tem is to be installed on it.
Seite 142
Controls Safety
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Indicator light for the front-seat
passenger airbags
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger
airbag in the roofliner indicates the operating
state of the front-seat passenger airbag.
The light indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
ther activated or deactivated.
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light
briefly lights up and then indicates whether the
airbags are either activated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator light lights up
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint
system or when the seat is
empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not
activated.
▷ The indicator light does not light up when,
for instance a correctly seated person of
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
tivated.
Detected child restraint systems
The system generally detects children seated
in a child restraint system, particularly in child
restraint systems required by NHTSA at the
point in time when the vehicle was manufac‐
tured. After installing a child restraint system,
make sure that the indicator light for the front-
seat passenger airbags lights up. This indi‐
cates that the child restraint system has been
detected and the front-seat passenger airbags
are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front-seat
passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front-seat passenger airbags very much de‐
pends on the positions of the driver's/front
passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon
as a respective message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
Calibrating the front seats
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
A corresponding message appears on the
Control Display.
1.
Press the switch and move the respective
seat all the way forward, until it stops.
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat
still moves forward slightly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the message on the Control Display disap‐
pears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re‐
peat calibration, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Intelligent Safety
Concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance system.
General information
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐
telligent Safety consists of one or more sys‐
tems that can help prevent an imminent colli‐
sion.
Seite 143
Safety Controls
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ Approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function, refer to page 145.
▷ Evasion assistance, refer to page 149.
▷ Person warning with City light braking
function, refer to page 151.
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to
page 154.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to
page 157.
▷ Side collision warning, refer to page 161.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Switching on/off
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems activate according to the
last setting.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are switched
off.
Button does not light up: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched
off.
Press button:
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a set‐
Seite 144
Controls Safety
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
ting is changed on the menu, all settings of the
menu are activated.
Press button repeatedly. The follow‐
ing settings are switched between:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the sub-functions, for instance setting for
warning time.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button:
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Approach control warning
with light braking function
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and activates brakes independ‐
ently, if needed.
General information
The system is controlled using a camera.
If the vehicle is equipped with a radar sensor,
the approach control warning is additionally
controlled via the cruise control radar sensor.
Intersection warning when equipped with a ra‐
dar sensor: in addition, a warning is issued at
intersections and junctions if a risk of collision
with crossing traffic is detected.
The approach control warning is available even
if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally, the approach control warning and
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
tem reactions.
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible risk of collision with vehicles at
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of
warnings may vary with the current driving sit‐
uation.
Detection range
Objects that the system can detect are taken
into account.
Intersection warning: the system is also able to
detect vehicles crossing your direction of
travel when these vehicles enter into the de‐
tection range of the system.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
Seite 145
Safety Controls
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
With Active Cruise Control: radar
sensor
The radar sensor is located in the lower area of
the front bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button.
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a set‐
ting is changed on the menu, all settings of the
menu are activated.
Press button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched
between:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
Seite 146
Controls Safety
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are switched
off.
Button does not light up: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched
off.
Setting the warning time
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Frontal Collision Warn."
5. Select the desired setting.
The selected time is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently used.
Warning with braking function
Display
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision
with a detected vehicle is imminent.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Crossing traffic warning:
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning when
vehicles cross your direction of
travel.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for instance when there
is the impending danger of a collision or the
distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
If a prewarning is issued, intervene in the situa‐
tion yourself.
Acute warning with braking function
Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
If an acute warning is issued, intervene in the
situation yourself. If necessary, the system
provides assistance, such as with an automatic
braking intervention, in a possible risk of colli‐
sion.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
Brake intervention, City light braking
function
The warning prompts the driver to react. Dur‐
ing a warning, the maximum braking force is
used when the brake is actuated. Prerequisite
Seite 147
Safety Controls
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on the
brake pedal.
The system can additionally assist possibly
with automatic braking intervention if there is a
risk of a collision.
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,
the vehicle may come to a complete stop.
The braking intervention takes place up to ap‐
prox. 50 mph/80 km/h.
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance
by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability
Control.
The driver may cancel the braking intervention
by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
With radar sensor and Active Cruise
Control: braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to react. Dur‐
ing a warning, the maximum braking force is
used when the brake is actuated. Prerequisite
is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on the
brake pedal.
The system can assist with automatic braking
intervention if there is a risk of a collision.
The braking intervention can bring the vehicle
to a complete stop.
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance
by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability
Control.
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h,
the braking intervention occurs as a brief brak‐
ing pressure. No automatic delay occurs.
The driver may cancel the braking intervention
by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Cross-traffic warning: brake intervention is not
performed in the event of cross traffic.
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Upper speed limit
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily. As soon as the speed drops back
down below this value, the system once again
responds according to the setting.
Intersection warning: the vehicle responds to
crossing traffic if its own speed is below ap‐
prox. 40 mph/65 km/h.
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
▷ Intersection warning: crossing vehicles if
their speed is higher than your own speed.
Seite 148
Controls Safety
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for instance DSC
OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield is dirty or covered in the area of
the interior mirror.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been
temporarily switched off due to excessively
high temperatures.
▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar
sensors are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
for example the warning time, the more warn‐
ings are displayed. Therefore, there may also
be an excess of premature or unjustified warn‐
ings and reactions.
Evasion assistance
Concept
The system supports the driver in making eva‐
sive maneuvers in certain situations, such as
when obstacles suddenly appear.
General information
The system issues a warning and intervenes to
support the driver if a lateral evasive maneuver
is possible. Sensors monitor and detect the
clearance around the vehicle. If the system
identifies space alongside the vehicle, it sup‐
ports an evasive maneuver begun by the driver
by safely providing targeted steering support.
Detection range
Objects that the system can detect are taken
into account.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
Overview
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
Seite 149
Safety Controls
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Front center bumper.
Front side bumper.
Rear bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Functional requirements
▷ Approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function, refer to page 145, is switched
on.
▷ Sensors detect sufficient clearance around
the vehicle.
Switching on/off
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Warning with evasion support
Display in the instrument cluster
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision
with a detected vehicle is imminent.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Seite 150
Controls Safety
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Acute warning with evasion support
Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
If an acute warning is issued, intervene in the
situation yourself. If there is a risk of collision,
the driver's evasive maneuvers are supported
by the system.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for instance DSC
OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield is dirty or covered in the area of
the interior mirror.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been
temporarily switched off due to excessively
high temperatures.
▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar
sensors are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
Person warning with City
light braking function
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents with
pedestrians.
When driving at city speeds, the system will is‐
sue a warning if there is imminent risk of a col‐
lision with pedestrians, and support with a
braking function.
General information
The system is active at speeds of approx.
3 mph/5 km/h up to approx. 40 mph/65 km/h.
The system reacts to people who are within
the detection range of the system.
The camera in the area of the interior mirror
controls the system.
Seite 151
Safety Controls
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Seite 152
Controls Safety
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Switching on/off manually
Press button.
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a set‐
ting is changed on the menu, all settings of the
menu are activated.
Press button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched
between:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are switched
off.
Button does not light up: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched
off.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, a
red warning triangle alternatively lights
up in the instrument cluster.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to react. Dur‐
ing a warning, the maximum braking force is
used when the brake is actuated. Prerequisite
for the brake booster is sufficiently quick and
hard stepping on the brake pedal.
If there is a risk of collision, the system may
also assist with braking.
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,
the vehicle may come to a complete stop.
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance
by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability
Control.
The driver may cancel the braking intervention
by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
Seite 153
Safety Controls
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
ited.
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield is dirty or covered in the area of
the interior mirror.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been
temporarily switched off due to excessively
high temperatures.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Lane departure warning
Concept
The lane departure warning alerts when the
vehicle on roads with lane markings is about to
leave the lane.
General information
This camera-based system warns starting at a
minimum speed.
The minimum speed is country-specific and is
displayed in the menu for the Intelligent Safety
systems.
Warnings are issued by means of a steering
wheel vibration. The severity of the steering
wheel vibration can be adjusted. The time of
the warning may vary depending on the cur‐
rent driving situation.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Vehicles with side collision warning: if in the
speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a lane
marking is crossed, the system intervenes with
a brief active steering intervention in addition
to vibrating. The system thus helps keep the
vehicle in the lane.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess road and traffic
safety. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in response
to a warning.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
Seite 154
Controls Safety
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
Functional requirements
The camera must detect the lane markings for
the lane departure warning to be active.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The lane departure warning activates automat‐
ically after departure if the function was
switched on at the end of the last trip.
Switching on/off manually
Press button.
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a set‐
ting is changed on the menu, all settings of the
menu are activated.
Press button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched
between:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are switched
off.
Button does not light up: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched
off.
Seite 155
Safety Controls
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Setting the warning frequency
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Lane Departure Warn."
5. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Always": the system issues a warning
whenever a hazardous situation is de‐
tected.
▷ "Reduced": some warnings are sup‐
pressed depending on the situation,
for instance during passing without a
turn signal or when purposely driving
over lane markings in curves.
▷ "Off": no warnings are issued.
The selected setting is stored for the driver
profile currently used.
Setting the force of the steering wheel
vibration
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Steering wheel vibration"
4. Select the desired setting.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety
systems and stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Vehicles with side collision warning:
switching steering intervention on/off
The steering intervention can be switched on
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion and lane departure warning.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Steering intervention"
The selected setting is stored for the driver
profile currently used.
Display in the instrument cluster
The system illuminates green: at least
one lane marking was detected and
warnings can be issued.
Warning function
If you leave the lane
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel vibrates in
accordance with the steering wheel vibration
setting.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.
With side collision warning
If in the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h
a lane marking is crossed, the system inter‐
venes with a brief active steering intervention
in addition to vibrating. The steering interven‐
tion helps keep the vehicle in the lane. The
steering intervention can be noticed on the
steering wheel and can be manually overridden
at any time.
With trailer towing
If the trailer power socket is in use, for instance
during operation with trailer or bicycle rack, no
steering intervention takes place.
End of warning
The warning is canceled in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter‐
venes.
Seite 156
Controls Safety
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield is dirty or covered in the area of
the interior mirror.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been
temporarily switched off due to excessively
high temperatures.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.
Active Blind Spot Detection
Concept
Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles in
the blind spot or vehicles approaching from
behind in the adjacent lane. A warning is is‐
sued in various gradations in these situations.
General information
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind and next to the vehicle when
traveling faster than a minimum speed.
The minimum speed is shown in the menu for
the Intelligent Safety systems.
The system indicates whether there are vehi‐
cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind in the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The light in the exterior mirror lights up dim‐
med.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐
uations described above.
The light in the exterior mirror flashes and the
steering wheel vibrates.
Vehicles with side collision warning: at speeds
between 45 mph/70 km/h and
130 mph/210 km/h, the system can intervene
with a brief active steering intervention and
help to return the vehicle into the lane.
Seite 157
Safety Controls
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The Active Blind Spot Detection is automati‐
cally activated after departure if the function
was switched on at the end of the last trip.
Switching on/off manually
Press button.
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a set‐
ting is changed on the menu, all settings of the
menu are activated.
Press button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched
between:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
Seite 158
Controls Safety
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are switched
off.
Button does not light up: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched
off.
Setting the warning time
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Blind Spot Detection"
5. Select the desired setting.
"Off": with this setting, no warning is out‐
put.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the force of the steering wheel
vibration
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Steering wheel vibration"
4. Select the desired setting.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety
systems and stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Vehicles with side collision warning:
switching steering intervention on/off
The steering intervention can be switched on
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion and lane departure warning.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Steering intervention"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Warning function
Light in the exterior mirror
Prewarning
The dimmed light in the exterior mirror indi‐
cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot
or approaching from behind.
Acute warning
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
and the light in the exterior mirror flashes
brightly.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the
critical zone.
Seite 159
Safety Controls
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
With side collision warning
If at speeds between 45 mph/70 km/h and
130 mph/210 km/h the vibrating steering
wheel is ignored and the lane marking crossed,
the system intervenes with a brief active steer‐
ing intervention. The steering intervention
helps return the vehicle into the lane. The
steering intervention can be noticed on the
steering wheel and can be manually overridden
at any time.
Flashing of the light
A flashing of the light during vehicle unlocking
serves as system self-test.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Upper speed limit
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily.
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system once again re‐
sponds according to the setting.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
for instance by stickers.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
For vehicles with side collision warning, the
steering intervention can be limited, for in‐
stance in the following situation:
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ When the lane markings are not white.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield is dirty or covered in the area of
the interior mirror.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been
temporarily switched off due to excessively
high temperatures.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.
If the trailer power socket is in use, for instance
during operation with trailer or bicycle rack, the
system cannot be switched on. A Check Con‐
trol message is displayed.
Displaying warnings
Depending on the selected warning settings,
for instance warning time, more warnings can
be displayed. However, there may also be an
excess of premature warnings of critical situa‐
tions.
Seite 160
Controls Safety
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Side collision warning
Concept
The system helps to avoid imminent side colli‐
sions.
General information
Four radar sensors in the bumpers monitor the
area next to the vehicle in the speed range
from approx. 45 mph/70 km/h to ap‐
prox. 130 mph/210 km/h.
The front camera determines the lane marking
positions.
If, for instance another vehicle is detected next
to the vehicle and if there is a risk of collision
with this vehicle, the system helps avoid the
collision via steering intervention.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
Functional requirements
The camera must detect the lane markings for
the side collision warning with steering inter‐
vention to be active.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
Front bumper.
Seite 161
Safety Controls
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Rear bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The side collision warning activates automati‐
cally after departure if the function was
switched on at the end of the last trip.
Switching on/off manually
Press button.
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a set‐
ting is changed on the menu, all settings of the
menu are activated.
Press button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched
between:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are switched
off.
Button does not light up: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched
off.
Seite 162
Controls Safety
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Warning function
Light in the exterior mirror
If there is a risk of collision
If there is a risk of collision, the light in the ex‐
terior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vi‐
brates. An active steering intervention takes
place to prevent collisions and maintain the ve‐
hicle within its own lane. The steering interven‐
tion can be noticed on the steering wheel and
can be manually overridden at any time.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
for instance by stickers.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield is dirty or covered in the area of
the interior mirror.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been
temporarily switched off due to excessively
high temperatures.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.
If the trailer power socket is in use, for instance
during operation with trailer or bicycle rack, the
system cannot be switched on. A Check Con‐
trol message is displayed.
Rear collision prevention
Concept
The system reacts to vehicles approaching
from behind.
Seite 163
Safety Controls
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
General information
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind the vehicle.
If a vehicle approaches from the rear at a cer‐
tain speed, the system responds as follows:
▷ Active Protection, refer to page 165: if a
collision seems to be unavoidable, Pre‐
Crash functions are triggered.
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
The system is deactivated in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ When driving in reverse.
▷ If the trailer power socket is in use, for in‐
stance during operation with trailer or bicy‐
cle rack.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
Overview
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ When the approaching vehicle approaches
slowly.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
for instance by stickers.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
Brake force display
Concept
Additional brake lights indicate emergency
braking to the traffic behind. This can reduce
the risk of a rear-end collision.
Seite 164
Controls Safety
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
General information
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lights light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lights additionally light up.
Active Protection
Concept
Active Protection prepares occupants and the
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving
or collision situations.
General information
Active Protection consists of various PreCrash
functions, which can vary depending on the
equipment.
The system is used to detect certain critical
driving situations that might lead to an acci‐
dent. This includes the following critical driving
situations:
▷ Emergency stop.
▷ Severe understeering.
▷ Severe oversteering.
Certain functions of several systems can -
within the system limits - lead to Active Pro‐
tection triggering:
▷ Approach control warning with braking
function: automatic brake intervention.
▷ Approach control warning with braking
function: brake booster.
▷ Rear collision prevention: detection of im‐
minent rear collisions.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility. Due to the system limits,
critical situation could not be detected reliably
or in time. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.◀
Function
When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's
and passenger's belt straps are automatically
tightened once after driving away.
In accident-critical situations, the following in‐
dividual functions become active as needed:
▷ Automatic pretensioning of the front safety
belts.
▷ Automatic window closing up to a narrow
gap.
▷ Automatic closing of the panoramic glass
sunroof, including sun protection.
After a critical driving situation without an acci‐
dent, the front safety belts are loosened again.
If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐
cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety
belt using the red button in the buckle. Fasten
the safety belt before continuing on your trip.
All other systems can be restored to the de‐
sired setting.
PostCrash – iBrake
Concept
In the event of an accident, the system can
bring the vehicle to a halt automatically without
intervention by the driver in certain situations.
This can reduce the risk of a further collision
and the consequences thereof.
Seite 165
Safety Controls
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
automatically.
Harder vehicle braking
It can be necessary to bring the vehicle in cer‐
tain situations to a halt quicker.
To do this, for a short time the braking pres‐
sure applied when stepping on the brake pedal
must be higher than the braking pressure ach‐
ieved by the automatic braking function. This
interrupts automatic braking.
Interrupting automatic braking
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic
braking in certain situations, for instance for an
evasive maneuver.
Interrupt automatic braking:
▷ By pressing the brake pedal.
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
Alertness assistant
Concept
The system can detect decreasing alertness or
fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous
trips, for instance on highways. In this situa‐
tion, it is recommended that the driver takes a
break.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess one's physical
state. An increasing lack of alertness or fatigue
may not be detected or not be detected in
time. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure
that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driv‐
ing style to traffic conditions.◀
Function
The system is switched on each time drive-
ready state is switched on.
After travel has begun, the system monitors
certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that
decreasing alertness or fatigue can be de‐
tected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering
behavior.
▷ Driving conditions, for instance length of
trip.
Starting at approx. 43 mph/70 km/h, the sys‐
tem is active and can also display a recom‐
mendation to take a break.
Break recommendation
Switching on/off, adjusting
The alertness assistant is active automatically
with each switching on of drive-ready state and
can thus display a break recommendation.
The break recommendation can also be
switched on or off and adjusted via iDrive.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Driver attention control"
4. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Off": no break recommendation is
made.
▷ "Standard": the break recommendation
is made with a defined value.
▷ "Sensitive": the break recommendation
is issued earlier.
Display
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display
with the recommendation to take a break.
Seite 166
Controls Safety
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
During the display, the following settings can
be selected:
▷ "Do not ask again"
▷ "Places to stop"
▷ "Remind me later"
The break recommendation is repeated af‐
ter 20 minutes.
After a break, another recommendation to take
a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following
situations, for instance and will either output an
incorrect warning or no warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of
a break during longer trips on highways.
Seite 167
Safety Controls
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Anti-lock Braking System
ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle maintains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing
active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, the system
automatically produces the greatest possible
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during emergency stop.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by the Antilock Brake System ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
Adaptive brake assistant
In combination with Active Cruise Control, this
system ensures that the brakes respond even
more rapidly when braking in critical situations.
Drive-off assistant
Concept
This system supports driving off on uphill
grades.
Driving away
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle loading or when a
trailer is used, the vehicle may roll back
slightly.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Concept
Within the physical limits, the system helps to
keep the vehicle on a steady course by reduc‐
ing engine speed and by braking the individual
wheels.
General information
DSC detects the following unstable driving
conditions, for instance:
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
Seite 168
Controls Driving stability control systems
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
When driving with roof load, for instance
with roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety
may not be ensured in driving-critical situa‐
tions due to the elevated center of gravity.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to
property. Do not deactivate Dynamic Stability
Control DSC when driving with roof load.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
DSC OFF
Deactivating/activating DSC
General information
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
reduced during acceleration and when driving
in curves.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Hold the button down until DSC OFF
is displayed in the instrument cluster
and the DSC OFF indicator light is illuminated.
Activating DSC
Press button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
light go out.
Display
In the instrument cluster
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐
activated.
The indicator light flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive and braking forces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
Concept
DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability
Control where forward momentum is opti‐
mized.
The system ensures maximum headway on
special road conditions or loose road surfaces,
for instance unplowed snowy roads, but with
somewhat limited driving stability.
General information
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in curves.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC in
the following situations:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
Seite 169
Driving stability control systems Controls
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
driving off from loose ground.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
DSC OFF
Activating/deactivating DTC
Activating DTC
Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC
OFF lights up.
Deactivating DTC
Press button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐
tor light go out.
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
If DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator light lights up: DTC is ac‐
tivated.
Automatic program change
The system automatically switches to "DSC
ON" in the following situations:
▷ If Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
function ACC is activated.
▷ On a braking intervention by the Intelligent
Safety systems.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
xDrive
Concept
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the ve‐
hicle. The interaction of xDrive and DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control further optimizes trac‐
tion and driving dynamics. xDrive variably
distributes the driving forces to the front and
rear axles as demanded by the driving situation
and road surface.
Display on the Control Display
Displaying xDrive view
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "xDrive status"
The following information is displayed:
▷ With a navigation system: compass display
for the driving direction.
▷ Pitch attitude with degree indication and
percentage.
▷ Transverse gradient with degree indica‐
tion.
▷ Graphic display for the steering angle.
Seite 170
Controls Driving stability control systems
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
HDC Hill Descent Control
Concept
Hill Descent Control, HDC, is a downhill control
feature that controls the vehicle speed on
steep downhill grades, for instance when driv‐
ing on unpaved roads.
When the system is active, the vehicle moves
at the speed set by the driver, without the
driver having to depress the brake pedal.
While HTC is controlling the speed, the system
automatically distributes the braking force to
the individual wheels. This improves vehicle
drivability and stability. If necessary, the Anti‐
lock Brake System prevents the wheels from
locking.
General information
Hill Descent Control can be activated at
speeds below approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Speeds can be set between approx.
2 mph/3 km/h and approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
When the vehicle is moving downhill, the sys‐
tem reduces the speed to the set value, within
the physical limits.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
HDC
Activating HDC
Press button. The LED above the button
lights up.
Speeds between approx. 2 mph/3 km/h and
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h are adopted as the
desired speed.
Emergency braking function, Active PDC: the
emergency braking function, refer to
page 188, is deactivated.
Display in the instrument cluster
A symbol and the selected de‐
sired speed are displayed.
▷ Green display: HDC is ac‐
tive, the system is reducing
the vehicle speed.
▷ Gray display: HDC is on standby.
Display in the Head-up Display
The HDC status can also be displayed in the
Head-up Display.
Increasing or decreasing vehicle
speed
Using the cruise control rocker switch
The desired speed can be changed using the
cruise control rocker switch on the steering
wheel.
▷ Press the rocker switch up: the speed in‐
creases gradually.
Seite 171
Driving stability control systems Controls
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ Press the rocker switch up and hold: the
speed increases while the rocker switch is
pressed.
▷ Press the rocker switch down: the speed
reduces gradually.
▷ Press the rocker switch down and hold: the
speed reduces while the rocker switch is
pressed.
Using the brake pedal
While HDC is controlling the speed, the set de‐
sired speed can be reduced by depressing the
brake pedal.
Deactivating HDC
Press button again. The LED goes out.
HDC is automatically deactivated above
approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Malfunction
If a malfunction occurs, a message is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Variable sport steering
The variable sport steering facilitates a direct
and agile driving style with little steering effort.
The variable sports steering works independ‐
ently of the current speed, varying the steering
ratio in line with the steering angle.
Seite 172
Controls Driving stability control systems
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Driver assistance systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Cruise control
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed. The
system accelerates and brakes automatically
as needed.
General information
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control characteristic can change in certain
ranges. For instance, the acceleration in ECO
PRO driving mode is more gentle.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
The use of the system can lead to an in‐
creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐
tions, for instance:
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet
conditions, or on a loose road surface.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to
property. Only use the system if driving at con‐
stant speed is possible.◀
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 173.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 174.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting, refer to page 175.
Store speed, refer to page 174.
Rocker switch:
Set speed, refer to page 174.
Switching cruise control on/off
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
Seite 173
Driver assistance systems Controls
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
to the current speed.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as desired speed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
if necessary.
Switching off
Press button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Pausing cruise control
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations, for example:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ Steptronic transmission: when selector
lever position D is disengaged.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated
or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐
vated.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter‐
venes.
▷ When SPORT PLUS is activated with Driv‐
ing Dynamics Control.
Setting the speed
Maintaining and storing the speed
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed, refer to
page 175, in the speedometer and briefly in
the instrument cluster.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
if necessary.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a
button.
Press button.
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
Seite 174
Controls Driver assistance systems
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the resistance point, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired
speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/
10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
celerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐
hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Continuing cruise control
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
Press button with the system inter‐
rupted.
Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐
ues.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Display in the speedometer
▷ Green marking: system is
active, the marking indicates
the desired speed.
▷ Orange/white marking: sys‐
tem is interrupted, the mark‐
ing indicates the stored
speed.
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
Indicator light
▷ Indicator light green: system is ac‐
tive.
▷ Gray indicator light: the system has
been interrupted.
▷ No indicator light: system is switched off.
Status display
The selected desired speed is hidden
after a brief time.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Some system information can also be dis‐
played in the Head-up Display.
The symbol is displayed when the set
desired speed is reached.
System limits
The desired speed is also maintained downhill.
The speed may not be maintained on uphill
grades if the engine power is insufficient.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex‐
ceed or drop below the set desired speed in
some situations, for instance on downhill or
uphill grades.
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go function ACC
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐
tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using
the buttons on the steering wheel.
Seite 175
Driver assistance systems Controls
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
The system maintains the desired speed on
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle ac‐
celerates or brakes automatically.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the
set distance to the vehicle ahead is main‐
tained. The speed is adjusted as far as the
given situation allows.
General information
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper
and a camera on the interior mirror to detect
vehicles driving ahead of you.
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control characteristic can change in certain
ranges. For instance, the acceleration in ECO
PRO driving mode is more gentle.
The distance can be adjusted in several steps.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec‐
tive speed.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and
then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐
riod, the system is able to detect this within the
given system limits.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.◀
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Risk of accident due to too high speed
differences to other vehicles, for instance in
the following situations:
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving
vehicle.
▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.◀
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 177.
Store/maintain speed, refer to
page 178.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 178.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting, refer to page 179.
Seite 176
Controls Driver assistance systems
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Button Function
Without steering and lane control
assistant:
Increase distance, refer to
page 179.
Without steering and lane control
assistant:
Reduce distance, refer to page 179.
With steering and lane control assis‐
tant:
Adjust distance, refer to page 179.
Rocker switch:
Set speed, refer to page 178.
With steering and lane control assis‐
tant:
Steering and lane control assistant
incl. Traffic Jam Assist on/off, refer
to page 182.
Radar sensor
The radar sensor is located in the front
bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Area of application
The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
The minimum speed that can be set is
20 mph/30 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set is
115 mph/180 km/h.
The system can also be activated when sta‐
tionary.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
to the current speed.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as desired speed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
if necessary.
Switching off
To switch off the system while standing, step
on brake pedal at the same time.
Seite 177
Driver assistance systems Controls
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Press button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on the
steering wheel.
If interrupting the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated
or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐
vated.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter‐
venes.
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled and the driv‐
er's door is opened while the vehicle is
standing still.
▷ If the system has not detected objects for
an extended period, for instance on a road
with very little traffic without curb or
shoulder markings.
▷ If the detection range of the radar is im‐
paired, for instance by dirt or heavy fog.
▷ After a longer stationary period when the
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the
system.
Setting the speed
Maintaining and storing the speed
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed, refer to
page 179, in the speedometer and briefly in
the instrument cluster.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
if necessary.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a
button.
Press button.
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
Seite 178
Controls Driver assistance systems
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the resistance point, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired
speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/
10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Adjusting distance
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility. Due to the system limits,
braking can be late. There is a risk of accidents
or risk of damage to property. Be aware to the
traffic situation at all times. Adjust the distance
to the traffic and weather conditions and main‐
tain the prescribed safety distance, possibly by
braking.◀
Without steering and lane control
assistant: reducing distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐
tance, refer to page 179.
Without steering and lane control
assistant: increasing distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐
tance, refer to page 179.
With steering and lane control
assistant: adjusting distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
Continuing cruise control
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
Press button with the system inter‐
rupted.
Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐
ues.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Display in the speedometer
▷ Green marking: system is
active, the marking indicates
the desired speed.
▷ Orange/white marking: sys‐
tem is interrupted, the mark‐
ing indicates the stored
speed.
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
Status display
The selected desired speed is hidden
after a brief time.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you
is shown.
Seite 179
Driver assistance systems Controls
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Symbol Description
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set automatically
after the system is switched
on.
System interrupted.
No distance control display, as
the accelerator pedal is being
pressed.
Detected vehicle
Symbol Description
Green symbol:
A vehicle has been detected
ahead of you. The system
maintains the set distance to
the vehicle in front.
As soon as the detected vehicle drives off, the
vehicle symbol in the distance indicator will
move away.
To accelerate, activate ACC, for instance by
briefly stepping on the accelerator pedal or
pressing the rocker switch.
Indicator/warning lights
Symbol Description
Vehicle symbol flashes:
The conditions are not ade‐
quate for the system to work.
The system was deactivated
but applies the brakes until you
actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
The vehicle symbol and dis‐
tance bars flash red and an
acoustic signal sounds:
Brake and make an evasive
maneuver, if necessary.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Desired speed
Some system information can also be dis‐
played in the Head-up Display.
The symbol is displayed when the set
desired speed is reached.
Distance information
The symbol is displayed when the dis‐
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead
is too short.
The distance information is active in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.
Seite 180
Controls Driver assistance systems
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected,
refer to page 131.
▷ Distance too short.
▷ Speed greater than approx.
40 mph/70 km/h.
System limits
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not
be detected.
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving
road users.
▷ For red traffic lights.
▷ For cross traffic.
▷ For oncoming traffic.
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as
your vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se‐
lected distance in certain situations, including
if you are driving significantly faster than vehi‐
cles driving ahead of you, for instance when
rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle
driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the
system requests that the driver intervene by
braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if
needed.
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
into a curve at an appropriate speed.
The system has a limited detection range. Sit‐
uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi‐
Seite 181
Driver assistance systems Controls
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be
detected very late.
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to
the bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐
ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐
ating. After releasing the accelerator pedal the
system is reactivated and controls speed inde‐
pendently.
Driving away
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example:
▷ On steep uphill grades.
▷ From bumps in the road.
▷ With a heavy trailer.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under un‐
favorable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer vehicle recognition.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that
are already recognized.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light con‐
ditions:
▷ Wet conditions.
▷ Snowfall.
▷ Slush.
▷ Fog.
▷ Glare.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for
instance by braking, steering or evading.
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill.
The speed may not be maintained on uphill
grades if the engine power is insufficient.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may in‐
tentionally exceed or drop below the set de‐
sired speed in some situations, for instance on
downhill or uphill grades.
Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the radar
sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be
caused by damage incurred, for instance dur‐
ing parking.
A Check Control message is displayed if the
system fails.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
The function for detecting and responding
when approaching stationary vehicles may be
limited in the following situations:
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A
Check Control message is displayed.
Steering and lane control
assistant
Concept
The system assists the driver in keeping the
vehicle within the lane. For this purpose, the
system executes supporting steering move‐
ments, for instance when driving in a curve.
Seite 182
Controls Driver assistance systems
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
General information
The system determines the position of the
lane markings and the vehicle driving ahead
using five radar sensors and a camera.
Depending on the speed, the system orients it‐
self according to the lane markings or vehicles
in front.
Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether
the steering wheel is being touched.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
Overview
Button on the steering wheel
Button Function
Steering and lane control assistant
incl. Traffic Jam Assist on/off, refer
to page 184.
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
Front center bumper.
Front side bumper.
Rear bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements must be
met for the system:
▷ Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h.
Seite 183
Driver assistance systems Controls
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ Sufficient lane width.
▷ Above approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane
marking on both sides is detected.
▷ Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane
marking on both sides or a vehicle driving
ahead is detected.
▷ Hands on the steering wheel rim.
▷ Wide curves.
▷ Drive in the center of the lane.
▷ Turn signal not actuated.
▷ Camera calibration immediately after vehi‐
cle delivery is completed.
Switching on/off
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering.
System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled, refer to
page 183.
Steering wheel symbol lights up green.
The system is active.
With the system switched on, the person
warning with City braking function and the side
collision warning are active.
Switching off
Press button on the steering wheel.
The indicator goes out.
The system does not perform supportive
steering wheel movements.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ When the steering wheel is released.
▷ When you manipulate steering.
▷ When you leave your own lane.
▷ When the turn signal is on.
▷ When the lane is too narrow.
▷ If for a particular time no lane marking is
detected and there is no vehicle driving in
front.
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering.
System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled, refer to
page 183.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Symbol Description
Gray steering wheel symbol:
The system is on standby.
Green steering wheel symbol:
The system is activated.
Steering wheel symbol flashes
yellow:
Lane marking driven over.
The steering wheel vibrates
where applicable.
Yellow steering wheel symbol:
System interruption is immi‐
nent.
Steering wheel symbol flashes
red, signal sounds:
System is switching off.
Seite 184
Controls Driver assistance systems
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Symbol Description
Green steering wheel symbol
and lane marking:
The system supports the driver
in keeping the vehicle within
the lane.
Green steering wheel symbol,
gray lane marking:
No lane marking detected or
vehicle outside of lane mark‐
ing.
Outside of the lane marking,
steering support continues to‐
ward the center of the lane.
If a lane marking is not de‐
tected, the vehicle follows the
vehicle ahead.
Yellow steering wheel symbol:
The hands are not grasping the
steering wheel. The system is
still active.
Red steering wheel symbol
and a signal sounds, if applica‐
ble:
The hands are not grasping the
steering wheel. System inter‐
rupted.
The system does not perform
supportive steering wheel
movements.
With Active Cruise Control, the
system may reduce the speed.
Displays in the Head-up Display
All system information can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
System limits
General information
The system cannot be activated or meaning‐
fully used in certain situations.
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Hands on the steering wheel
The sensors cannot detect hand-steering
wheel contact in the following situations:
▷ Driving with gloves.
▷ Protective covers on the steering wheel.
Narrow lanes
When driving within narrow lanes, the system
cannot be activated or effectively used, for in‐
stance in the following situations:
▷ In construction areas.
▷ In rescue lanes.
▷ Within city limits.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under un‐
favorable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer vehicle recognition.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that
are already recognized.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light con‐
ditions:
▷ Wet conditions.
▷ Snowfall.
▷ Slush.
▷ Fog.
Seite 185
Driver assistance systems Controls
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ Glare.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for
instance by braking, steering or evading.
PDC Park Distance Control
Concept
PDC is a support when parking. Objects that
you are approaching slowly in front of or be‐
hind the vehicle are indicated with:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
With parking assistant: obstacles on the side of
the vehicle that are detected by the sensors of
the parking assistant, may also be reported by
the side protection function, refer to page 189.
General information
The ultrasound sensors for distance measure‐
ments are located in the bumpers and possibly
on the sides of the vehicle.
The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im‐
pending collision at a distance to the object of
approx. 27 in/70 cm.
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic
warning is already issued at a distance to the
object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control is activated, the warning can be
delayed due to physical circumstances. There
is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol is not yet active.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
for instance in the bumpers.
Functional requirements
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers, bicycle racks.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system switches on automatically in the
following situations:
Seite 186
Controls Driver assistance systems
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged
when the engine is running.
▷ While approaching detected obstacles if
the speed is slower than approx.
2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activation distance
depends on the situation in question.
You may switch automatic activation on and off
when obstacles are detected.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Parking"
4. "Automatic PDC activation": only with re‐
spective equipment.
5. "Automatic PDC activation"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Depending on equipment, an additional cam‐
era view is also switched on.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Switching on/off manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
WARNING
Signal tones
General information
When approaching an object, an intermittent
sound indicates the position of the object. E.g.,
if an object is detected to the left rear of the
vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
If there are objects in front of and behind the
vehicle at the same time, with a distance
smaller than approx. 10 in/25 cm, an alternat‐
ing constant tone will sound.
Steptronic transmission: the intermittent tone
and constant tone are switched off if the selec‐
tor lever position P is engaged.
The intermittent tone is switched off after a
short time when the vehicle is stationary.
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
entertainment volume can be adjusted.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Tone"
4. "Volume settings"
5. "PDC"
6. Set the desired value.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Seite 187
Driver assistance systems Controls
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object is
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are already displayed on the Con‐
trol Display before a signal sounds.
The display appears as soon as PDC is acti‐
vated.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red.
Pathway lines are faded in for better estimation
of the required space.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC or to a
different view with obstacle markings as
needed:
"Rear view camera"
Crossing traffic warning, refer to page 205:
depending on the equipment, it is warned in
the PDC display against vehicles approaching
in the front or rear from the side.
With parking assistant and Steptronic
transmission: emergency braking
function, Active PDC
Concept
The emergency braking function of PDC ini‐
tiates an emergency braking in case of acute
risk of collision.
General information
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre‐
vented under all circumstances.
The function is available from walking speed
while backing up or rolling backward.
A press of the accelerator pedal interrupts the
braking intervention.
After emergency braking to a stop, further
creeping toward an obstacle is possible. To
creep toward the obstacle, lightly press the ac‐
celerator pedal and release it again.
If the accelerator pedal is heavily depressed,
the vehicle drives off as usual. Manual braking
is possible at any time.
The system uses the ultrasound sensors of
PDC and parking assistant.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv‐
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and
vehicle surroundings closely and actively inter‐
vene where appropriate.◀
Activating/deactivating the system
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Parking"
4. "Active PDC with braking interv."
5. "Active PDC with braking interv."
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
System limits
The system cannot be used in situations
such as the following:
▷ When Hill Descent Control, refer to
page 171, is active, the emergency braking
function is deactivated.
▷ During operation with a trailer.
If necessary, deactivate the system via iDrive.
Seite 188
Controls Driver assistance systems
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
With parking assistant: side
protection
Concept
The system warns of obstacles on the side of
the vehicle.
General information
The system uses the ultrasound sensors of
PDC and parking assistant.
Display
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the vehicle at the
sides.
▷ Color markings: warning against detected
obstacles.
▷ Gray markings, hatched area: no obstacles
were detected.
▷ No markings, black area: the area next to
the vehicle was not yet captured.
Limits of side protection
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
The system does not detect whether an obsta‐
cle moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary,
the markings are shown in black after a certain
time. The area next to the vehicle must be
newly captured.
Side protection is not available, if the trailer
power socket is in use.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
With trailer or trailer power socket is
in use
The rear PDC functions are switched off.
White symbol is displayed.
With appropriate equipment, the range
of the sensors is shown as a shaded
area on the Control Display.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for in‐
stance coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, for instance from passing vehicles
or loud machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, wet conditions,
snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges.
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
Seite 189
Driver assistance systems Controls
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ With small and low objects, for instance
boxes.
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane.
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
▷ With plants and bushes.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter
of the vehicle is not taken into account by
the system.
False warnings
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐
lowing conditions even though there is no ob‐
stacle within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered
with ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, for instance in underground
garages.
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ When the trailer hitch cover is not on
straight.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for in‐
stance sweeping machines, high pressure
steam cleaners or neon lights.
To prevent false alarms, switch off automatic
PDC activation on obstacle detection, for in‐
stance in automatic vehicle washes, refer to
page 186.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
White symbol is displayed, and the
range of the sensors is dimmed on the
Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Without Surround View:
rearview camera
Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
Display.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv‐
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and
vehicle surroundings closely and actively inter‐
vene where appropriate.◀
Seite 190
Controls Driver assistance systems
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Overview
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly:
button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tailgate.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
necessary, clean the camera lens.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if se‐
lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐
gine is running.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly:
switching on/off manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
PDC Park Distance Control is shown on the
Control Display.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
Switching the view via iDrive
With PDC Park Distance Control activated:
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Functional requirements
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems
and trailers that are not connected to a
trailer power socket can restrict the visibil‐
ity range of the camera.
Assistance functions
General information
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
The assistance functions can be manually acti‐
vated.
▷ "Parking aid lines".
Pathway lines and turning radius lines are
displayed, refer to page 192.
▷ "Obstacle marking".
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, the
obstacles detected by PDC Park Distance
Control are displayed, refer to page 192,
by markings.
Seite 191
Driver assistance systems Controls
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ "Trailer hitch - zoom".
A zoomed image of the trailer hitch is dis‐
played, refer to page 192.
Parking aid lines
Pathway lines
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the steering angle
and are continuously adjusted to the steering
wheel movements.
Turning radius lines
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
on the camera image together with pathway
lines.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
Parking using pathway and turning radius
lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning
radius line leads to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre‐
sponding turning radius line.
Obstacle marking
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, obsta‐
cles behind the vehicle are detected by the
PDC Park Distance Control sensors.
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image
of the rearview camera.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark‐
ings match the markings of the PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control.
Zoom on trailer hitch
To make it easier to attach a trailer, you can
zoom in on the view of the trailer hitch.
Two static circle segments show the distance
between the trailer and the trailer hitch.
Seite 192
Controls Driver assistance systems
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
A docking line dependent on the steering an‐
gle helps with aiming for the trailer with the
trailer hitch.
When zooming in, remember that the view may
no longer show certain obstacles.
Setting brightness and contrast via
iDrive
With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Move the Controller to the left.
2.
▷ "Brightness"
▷ "Contrast"
3. Set the desired value.
System limits
Deactivated camera
If the camera is deactivated, for instance if the
tailgate is open, the camera image is displayed
hatched in gray.
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, some
assistance functions also consider data from
PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance
Control chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti‐
mate the distance from the objects on the dis‐
play.
Surround View with parking
assistant Plus
Concept
The system provides assistance in parking and
maneuvering. The area around the vehicle is
shown on the Control Display.
General information
Several cameras capture the area from differ‐
ent selectable perspectives. In addition, assis‐
tance functions, for instance guidelines, can be
faded into the display.
The following camera perspectives can be dis‐
played:
▷ Automatic camera perspective, refer to
page 195: the system shows the camera
perspective suitable for the respective
driving situation.
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 195: for
representing the areas behind the vehicle.
▷ Right-hand and left-hand side view, refer
to page 197: for representing the areas on
the sides of the vehicle.
▷ Camera perspective movable via iDrive, re‐
fer to page 195.
▷ Panorama View, refer to page 198: to
present cross traffic, for instance at junc‐
tions and driveways, depending on the cur‐
rently engaged gear.
Depending on the view, the environment
around the vehicle or a part of it is depicted.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv‐
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and
vehicle surroundings closely and actively inter‐
vene where appropriate.◀
Seite 193
Driver assistance systems Controls
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Panorama View
Cameras
Front camera
Rearview camera
One camera is located at the bottom of each
exterior mirror housing.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt on
the camera lenses. If required, clean the cam‐
era lenses.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if se‐
lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐
gine is running.
The camera perspective suitable for the re‐
spective driving situation is displayed.
Switching on/off manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera cannot be switched off if
the reverse gear is engaged.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Seite 194
Controls Driver assistance systems
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Camera perspective
Overview
1 Function bar
2 Selection window
3 Side view
4 Automatic camera perspective
5 Movable camera perspective
6 Camera image
7 Rearview camera
Selection window
The individual camera perspectives can be se‐
lected in the selection window via iDrive.
Side view
The side view can be selected for the right or
left vehicle side.
This view helps when positioning the vehicle at
the curb or with other obstacles on the side by
displaying the side surroundings.
The side view looks from rear to front and in
case of danger, focuses automatically on pos‐
sible obstacles.
Automatic camera perspective
The automatic camera perspective shows a
steering-dependent view in the respective
driving direction.
This perspective adapts to the respective driv‐
ing situation.
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view
changes to a fixed display of the area in front or
at the rear behind the bumper or, if necessary,
changes to a side view.
When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic
camera perspective is closed and the system
uses a fixed perspective of the rearview cam‐
era. If necessary, manually select the auto‐
matic camera perspective when reverse gear is
engaged. The automatic camera perspective
will be retained for the current parking maneu‐
ver.
Movable camera perspective
With selection of the movable camera per‐
spective, a circle appears on the Control Dis‐
play.
By turning the Controller or via touch function,
specified perspectives on the circle can be se‐
lected.
The current perspective is marked with a cam‐
era symbol.
With BMW Gesture Control: the movable cam‐
era perspective can be moved around the cir‐
cle using BMW Gesture Control, refer to
page 33.
To leave the circle, move the Controller side‐
ways and press or tap the active camera sym‐
bol via the touchscreen.
Rearview camera
This view shows the picture of the rearview
camera.
Function bar
Assistance functions, refer to page 196, can
be activated via the function bar and settings
applied.
▷ "Parking Assistant", refer to page 200.
▷ "Brightness", refer to page 199.
▷ "Contrast", refer to page 199.
▷ "Parking aid lines", refer to page 196.
▷ "Obstacle marking", refer to page 196.
Seite 195
Driver assistance systems Controls
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ "Trailer hitch - zoom", refer to
page 197.
▷ "Car wash", refer to page 197.
▷ "Settings": apply settings, for instance
to use the activation points for Panorama
View.
Assistance functions
General information
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
The following assistance functions can be
manually activated:
▷ "Parking aid lines".
▷ "Obstacle marking".
▷ "Trailer hitch - zoom".
▷ "Car wash".
The following assistance functions are auto‐
matically displayed:
▷ Side protection, refer to page 197.
▷ Door opening angle, refer to page 197.
Parking aid lines
Pathway lines
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the steering angle
and are continuously adjusted to the steering
wheel movements.
Turning radius lines
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
on the camera image together with pathway
lines.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
Parking using pathway and turning radius
lines
1.
Position the vehicle so that the red turning
radius line leads to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre‐
sponding turning radius line.
Obstacle marking
Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by
the PDC Park Distance Control sensors.
Obstacle markings can be shown in the cam‐
era image.
Seite 196
Controls Driver assistance systems
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark‐
ings match the markings of the PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control.
Vehicle wash view
The vehicle wash view assists when entering a
vehicle wash by displaying the floor and the
vehicle's own track.
Zoom on trailer hitch
To make it easier to attach a trailer, you can
zoom in on the view of the trailer hitch.
Two static circle segments show the distance
between the trailer and the trailer hitch.
A docking line dependent on the steering an‐
gle helps with aiming for the trailer with the
trailer hitch.
Show the trailer hitch via iDrive, refer to
page 196.
When zooming in, remember that the view may
no longer show certain obstacles.
Side protection
Concept
The system warns of obstacles on the side of
the vehicle.
Display
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the vehicle at the
sides.
▷ No markings: no obstacles were detected.
▷ Color markings: warning against detected
obstacles.
Limits of side protection
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
The system does not detect whether an obsta‐
cle moves later on. For this reason, at stand‐
still, the markings are not shown anymore in
the display after a certain time. The area next
to the vehicle must be newly captured.
Door opening angle
Concept
If obstacle marking is activated, the system in‐
dicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the open‐
ing angles of the doors.
The system does not provide a warning of ap‐
proaching traffic.
Seite 197
Driver assistance systems Controls
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Steptronic transmission: the maximum open‐
ing angles of the doors are displayed in selec‐
tor lever position P.
As soon as the vehicle begins moving, the
opening angles are replaced by parking aid
lines.
Limits of the display
The vehicle surroundings are displayed with
distorted image for technical reasons.
Even if the symbols for the door opening an‐
gles do not cross other objects on the Control
Display, the following needs to be noted when
parking next to other objects:
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding
objects may be closer than they appear on the
Control Display.
Panorama View
Concept
The system provides an early look at cross
traffic at blind driveways and intersections.
General information
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left
and right of the vehicle can only be detected
relatively late from the driver's seat. The cam‐
eras in the front and rear capture the sideways
traffic area to improve the view.
Yellow lines in the screen display mark the
front and rear end of the vehicle.
The camera image shows different levels of
distortion in some areas and is thus not suita‐
ble for distance estimations.
Display on the Control Display
Press the button when the engine is run‐
ning.
Depending on the driving direction, the image
of the respective camera is displayed:
▷ "front": front camera image.
▷ "rear": rear camera image.
If the vehicle is appropriately equipped, the
crossing traffic warning, refer to page 205, can
additionally warn against oncoming vehicles
using radar sensors.
With navigation system: activation
points
Concept
Positions at which Panorama View is to switch
on automatically can be stored as activation
points as soon as a GPS signal is received.
General information
Up to ten activation points can be stored.
Activation points can be used when driving for‐
ward for the front camera.
Storing activation points
1.
Drive to the position at which the system is
to be switched on, and stop.
2.
Press button.
Seite 198
Controls Driver assistance systems
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "Add activation point"
The current position is displayed.
5. "Add activation point"
Activation points are, if possible, stored with
town/city and street address, or else with the
GPS coordinates.
Using activation points
The use of activation points can be switched
on and off.
1.
Press button.
2. Move the Controller to the left.
3. "Settings"
4. "Panorama view, GPS-based"
5. "Panorama view, GPS-based"
Displaying activation points
1. Press button.
2. Move the Controller to the left.
3. "Show activation points"
A list of all activation points is displayed.
Renaming or deleting activation points
1. Press button.
2. Move the Controller to the left.
3. "Show activation points"
A list of all activation points is displayed.
4. Select an activation point as needed.
5.
▷ "Rename"
▷ "Delete this activation point"
▷ "Delete all activation points"
Setting brightness and contrast
Brightness and contrast can be adjusted with
Surround View or Panorama View switched on.
Via iDrive:
1. Move the Controller to the left.
2.
▷ "Brightness"
▷ "Contrast"
3. Set the desired value.
Functional limitations
The system can be used only to a limited ex‐
tent in the following situations:
▷ In poor light.
▷ In case of soiled cameras.
▷ With a door open.
▷ With the tailgate open.
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
Gray hatched areas with symbol, for instance
open door, in the camera image mark areas
that are currently not displayed.
System limits
Non-visible areas
Because of the camera angle, the areas under
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Some assistance functions also consider data
from the PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow, refer to page 186, the notes in the PDC
Park Distance Control chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti‐
mate the distance from the objects on the dis‐
play.
Malfunction
A camera malfunction is displayed on the Con‐
trol Display.
Seite 199
Driver assistance systems Controls
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
A yellow symbol is displayed and the
recording range of the malfunctioning
camera is displayed in black on the
Control Display.
Remote 3D View
Concept
Using the BMW Connected App and the cam‐
era images from Surround View, the vehicle
surroundings can be displayed on a mobile de‐
vice, for instance a smartphone.
The function displays a momentary view of the
situation.
Functional requirements
▷ Data transmission must be activated, refer
to page 42.
▷ BMW Connected App must be installed on
the mobile device.
Switching the function on/off
Via iDrive:
1.
With the standby state switched on: "My
Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Data privacy"
4. "Remote 3D View"
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In poor light.
▷ In case of soiled cameras.
▷ With a door or the tailgate open. Dark fields
in the display indicate areas that are not re‐
corded by the system.
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
▷ When other camera functions are being
performed in the vehicle.
▷ When the vehicle moves faster than walk‐
ing speed.
▷ It may not be possible to use the function
in every country.
▷ For reasons of data protection, the func‐
tion can only be used three times within
two hours.
Parking assistant
Concept
The system supports parking in the following
situations:
▷ When parking parallel to the road, parallel
parking.
▷ When reverse parking diagonally to the
road, diagonal parking. The system orients
itself with the middle of the parking space
during diagonal parking.
General information
Handling
Parking assistant handling is divided into three
steps:
▷ Switching on and activating.
▷ Parking space search.
▷ Parking.
System status and instructions on required ac‐
tions are displayed on the Control Display.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle.
Seite 200
Controls Driver assistance systems
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Steptronic transmission
The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐
sible parking line and takes control of the fol‐
lowing functions during the parking procedure:
▷ Steering.
▷ Accelerating and braking.
▷ Changing the gears.
Press and hold the park assistance button for
the duration of the parking procedure. Parking
is automatic.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
If the trailer hitch is used, the parking as‐
sistant can cause damage due to covered sen‐
sors. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
damage to property. The parking assistant
should not be used during trailer towing or if
the trailer hitch is used, for instance bicycle
rack.◀
NOTE
The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
The safety information of the PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control, refer to page 186, applies in ad‐
dition.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
With the four side ultrasound sensors, arrows,
and the ultrasound sensors of PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control in the bumpers, the parking
spaces are measured and the distances to ob‐
stacles determined.
Functional requirements
Ultrasound sensors
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
For measuring parking spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
Seite 201
Driver assistance systems Controls
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
General information:
▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length
of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
Parallel parking to the road:
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
2.6 ft/0.8 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Diagonal parking:
▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle's
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.
▷ Minimum depth: your vehicle's length.
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must
be estimated by the driver. Due to techni‐
cal limitations, the system is only able to
approximate the depth of diagonal parking
spaces.
For parking
▷ Doors and tailgate are closed.
▷ The parking brake is released.
Steptronic transmission:
▷ Driver's safety belt is fastened.
Switching on and activating
Switching on with the button
Press park assistance button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Switching on with reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
Display on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but
not activated.
The system is activated.
Parking space search and system
status
▷ Symbol P on the vehicle image: the parking
assistant is activated and the parking
space search is active.
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant
is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
lighted in color and a signal sounds. Switch
signal tone on/off, refer to page 204.
▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is
clearly detected, the system automatically
adjusts the suitable parking method. In the
case of parking spaces suitable for parallel
and diagonal parking, a selection menu is
displayed. In this case, the desired parking
method must be selected manually.
Seite 202
Controls Driver assistance systems
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has
been taken over by system.
▷ Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
activated. When the system is deactivated,
the displays on the Control Display are
shown in gray.
Parking using the parking assistant
Parking
1. Press the park assistance button or
shift into reverse gear to switch on, refer to
page 202, the parking assistant. Activate
the parking assistant, if needed.
Parking assistant is activated.
2. Drive by the row of parked vehicles at a
speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h
and at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on
the Control Display, refer to page 202.
3. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
Steptronic transmission:
Press and hold the park assistance button
for the duration of the parking procedure.
At the end of the parking procedure, the P
selector lever position is set.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the Control Display.
4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
▷ Steptronic transmission: release the
park assistance button during the
parking procedure.
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or
takes over steering.
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road
surfaces.
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome, such as curbs.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly
appear.
▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays
clearances that are too small.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts
or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
▷ When switching to another function on the
Control Display.
Steptronic transmission:
▷ When the park assistance button is re‐
leased.
▷ If the tailgate is open.
▷ If doors are open.
▷ When setting the parking brake.
▷ During acceleration.
▷ When the brake pedal remains pressed for
an extended period while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Resuming
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
tinued, if needed.
Seite 203
Driver assistance systems Controls
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to
page 202, and follow the instructions on the
Control Display.
Switching off
The system can be switched off manually:
Press park assistance button.
Switching signal tone for suitable
parking spaces on/off
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Parking"
4. "Parking Assistant"
5. "Sound if parking space detected"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐
tance in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.
▷ When towing a trailer.
▷ For diagonal parking spaces.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.
▷ In case of changes to an already-measured
parking space.
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an
edge of a port.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for in‐
stance coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, for instance from passing vehicles
or loud machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, wet conditions,
snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges.
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ With small and low objects, for instance
boxes.
Seite 204
Controls Driver assistance systems
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane.
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
▷ With plants and bushes.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter
of the vehicle is not taken into account by
the system.
Parking spaces that are not suitable may be
detected or suitable parking spaces may not
be detected at all.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Crossing traffic warning
Concept
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind the vehicle.
At blind driveways or when driving out of diag‐
onal parking spaces, approaching cross traffic
is detected sooner by the system than is pos‐
sible from the driver's seat.
The system indicates approaching traffic.
The respective display is called up on the Con‐
trol Display. A signal tone may sound and the
light in the exterior mirror may flash.
With the respective equipment variant, the
traffic area in front of the vehicle is monitored
as well. Two additional radar sensors are lo‐
cated in the front bumpers.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Seite 205
Driver assistance systems Controls
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper.
With the respective equipment variant, there
are two additional radar sensors in the front
bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Activating/deactivating the system
1. Press park assistance button.
2. Move the Controller to the left.
3. "Settings"
4. "Cross traffic alert"
5. "Cross traffic alert"
Switching on automatically
If the system was activated on the Control Dis‐
play, it is automatically switched on as soon as
PDC Park Distance Control or Panorama View
is active and a gear is engaged.
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is
switched on.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, the front
system is switched on when a forward gear is
engaged.
Switching off automatically
The system is automatically switched off in the
following situations:
▷ When the speed exceeds walking speed.
▷ With the steering and lane control assistant
active: when a certain driving distance is
exceeded.
▷ With an active parking operation of the
parking assistant.
WARNING
Light in the exterior mirror
The light in the exterior mirror flashes if vehi‐
cles are detected by the rear sensors and your
own vehicle is moving backwards.
Seite 206
Controls Driver assistance systems
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Display in the PDC Park Distance
Control view
In the PDC Park Distance Control view, the re‐
spective boundary area flashes red, if vehicles
are detected by the sensors.
Display in the camera view
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the
camera view flashes red, if vehicles are de‐
tected by the sensors.
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your
own vehicle.
Acoustic warning
In addition to the optical indicator, a warning
signal sounds if your own vehicle moves into
the respective direction.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is
very high.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
for instance by stickers.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ If crossing objects move at a very slow
speed.
▷ If other objects are in the capture range of
the sensors, that hide cross traffic.
If the trailer power socket is in use, for instance
during operation with trailer or bicycle rack,
crossing traffic warning is not available for the
area behind the vehicle.
Seite 207
Driver assistance systems Controls
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Dynamic Damping Control
Concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
eling on uneven road surfaces.
This enhances the driving dynamics and driv‐
ing comfort depending on the road surface
condition and driving style.
General information
The system offers several different damping
settings.
The damping settings are assigned to the dif‐
ferent driving modes of the Driving Dynamics
Control, refer to page 115.
Driving mode Damper tuning
COMFORT
ECO PRO
Balanced out
SPORT Firm
Adaptive M chassis
Concept
The Adaptive M chassis is a controllable sport
chassis/suspension. This system reduces un‐
desirable vehicle motion when using a dynamic
driving style or traveling on uneven road surfa‐
ces.
This enhances the driving dynamics and driv‐
ing comfort depending on the road surface
condition and driving style.
General information
The system offers several different damping
settings.
These are assigned to the different driving
modes of the Driving Dynamics Control, refer
to page 115.
Driving mode Damper tuning
SPORT Firm
SPORT PLUS Firm
COMFORT/ECO PRO Balanced out
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of
the vehicle.
To increase maneuverability, wheels are
braked individually when a sporty driving style
is used. The resulting braking power is simul‐
taneously largely compensated by an engine
intervention.
Seite 208
Controls Driving comfort
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Climate control
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Interior air quality
The air quality inside the vehicle is improved
by an emissions-tested interior, a microfilter,
and a climate-control system for regulating
temperature, air flow, and recirculated-air
mode.
In addition there are other functions which de‐
pend on the vehicle's equipment, for instance
microfilter/activated-charcoal filter, ionization,
fragrancing, automatic climate control with au‐
tomatic recirculated-air control AUC, and
parked-car ventilation.
Automatic climate control
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Climate control functions
Button Function
Temperature, refer to
page 210.
Climate control operation, refer
to page 210.
AUTO program, refer to
page 210.
Recirculated-air mode, refer to
page 210.
Air flow, manual, refer to
page 211.
Air distribution, manual, refer
to page 211.
Rear window defroster, refer to
page 211.
Seat heating, refer to page 91.
Switching on/off
Switching on
Press any button except for the following:
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Left side of air flow button.
▷ Seat heating.
Seite 209
Climate control Controls
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Switching off
Press and hold the left button until the
system switches off.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed,
by using the maximum cooling or heating ca‐
pacity, and then keeps it constant.
Settings
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
Do not rapidly switch between
different temperature settings.
Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐
ture setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
drive-ready state switched on.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with air condi‐
tioning switched on.
Air conditioning is switched on with the engine
running.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when drive-
ready state is switched on.
The air conditioning is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops and collects un‐
derneath the vehicle.
AUTO program
Concept
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are
controlled automatically.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
program switched on.
Depending on the selected temperature and
outside influences, the air is directed to the
windshield, side windows, upper body, and
into the floor area.
The air conditioning, refer to page 210, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
The AUTO program is switched off automati‐
cally, when manual air distribution is set.
Recirculated-air mode
Concept
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air flow within the
vehicle.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on: the supply of outside air is perma‐
nently shut off.
Air conditioning is automatically switched
on as well to prevent window condensa‐
tion.
Seite 210
Controls Climate control
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
mode switches off automatically after a certain
amount of time, depending on the environ‐
mental conditions.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
If there is window condensation, switch off re‐
circulated-air mode or defog the windows, re‐
fer to page 211.
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
Operation
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The intensity is indicated by LEDs. The high‐
est level is active when seven LEDs are lit.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Controlling the air distribution
manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be
adjusted manually.
Operation
Turn the wheel to select the de‐
sired program or the desired in‐
termediate setting.
▷ Windows.
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
▷ Floor area.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Concept
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win‐
dows.
Settings
Make the following settings to defrost the win‐
dows and remove condensation:
▷ Direct the air distribution onto the win‐
dows.
▷ Increasing the air flow.
▷ Increase the temperature.
▷ Switch on the air conditioning if needed.
Rear window defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The function is available with the en‐
gine running.
The rear window defroster switches off auto‐
matically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air.
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous
pollutants from the outside air that enters the
vehicle.
Have this combined filter changed during vehi‐
cle maintenance, refer to page 305.
Seite 211
Climate control Controls
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Automatic climate control
with enhanced features
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Climate control functions
Button Function
Temperature, refer to
page 212.
Climate control operation, refer
to page 213.
Maximum cooling, refer to
page 213.
AUTO program, refer to
page 213.
Recirculated-air mode, refer to
page 214.
Air flow, manual, refer to
page 214.
Air distribution, manual, refer
to page 214.
SYNC program, refer to
page 215.
Defrost and defog window, re‐
fer to page 215.
Button Function
Rear window defroster, refer to
page 215.
Active seat ventilation, refer to
page 92.
Seat heating, refer to page 91.
Open the Climate menu.
Switching on/off
Switching on
Press any button except for the following:
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Left side of air flow button.
▷ SYNC program.
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Seat ventilation.
Switching off
Press and hold the left button until the
system switches off.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed,
by using the maximum cooling or heating ca‐
pacity, and then keeps it constant.
Settings
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
Do not rapidly switch between
different temperature settings.
Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
Seite 212
Controls Climate control
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐
ture setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
drive-ready state switched on.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with air condi‐
tioning switched on.
Air conditioning is switched on with the engine
running.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when drive-
ready state is switched on.
The air conditioning is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops and collects un‐
derneath the vehicle.
Maximum cooling
Concept
The system is set to the lowest temperature,
optimum air flow and recirculated-air mode
with the drive-ready state switched on.
General information
The function is available with external temper‐
atures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
drive-ready state switched on.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the sys‐
tem switched on.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
Adjust air flow on the driver's side with the pro‐
gram active.
AUTO program
Concept
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are
controlled automatically.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
program switched on.
Depending on the selected temperature, the
intensity of the AUTO program, and outside in‐
fluences, the air is directed to the windshield,
side windows, upper body, and into the floor
area.
The air conditioning, refer to page 213, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window
condensation as much as possible.
The AUTO program is switched off automati‐
cally, when manual air distribution is set.
Intensity
With the AUTO program switched on, the in‐
tensity can be set. This changes the automatic
control for the air flow and air distribution.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Automatic recirculated-air control
AUC
Concept
The automatic recirculated-air control AUC
recognizes odors or pollutants in the outside
Seite 213
Climate control Controls
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
air. The outside air supply is shut off and the
interior air is recirculated.
General information
If the system is activated, a sensor detects pol‐
lutants in the outside air and controls the shut-
off automatically.
If the system is deactivated, outside air contin‐
uously flows into the car's interior.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED lights up if the system is
switched on using the button.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. If necessary, "Air quality"
5. "Automatic air recirculation"
If there is window condensation, switch off re‐
circulated-air mode or defog the windows, re‐
fer to page 215.
Recirculated-air mode
Concept
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air flow within the
vehicle.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on: the supply of outside air is perma‐
nently shut off.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
If there is window condensation, switch off re‐
circulated-air mode or defog the windows, re‐
fer to page 215.
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
General information
To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTO
program first.
Operation
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Controlling the air distribution
manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be
adjusted manually.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
Seite 214
Controls Climate control
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ Floor area.
▷ Windows and floor area.
▷ Windows: driver's side only.
▷ Windows and upper body.
▷ Upper body region.
The selected air distribution is shown on the
display of the automatic climate control.
If there is window condensation, defog the
windows, refer to page 215.
SYNC program
Concept
The following settings of the driver's side can
be transferred to the front-passenger side and
the rear:
▷ Temperature.
▷ Air distribution.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the SYNC
program switched on.
The program is switched off automatically if
the settings on the front passenger side or in
the rear are changed.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Concept
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win‐
dows.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the sys‐
tem switched on.
Point the side vents towards the side windows,
as needed. The air flow can be adjusted man‐
ually with the system switched on.
If there is window condensation, press
the button or switch on the air condi‐
tioning to utilize the condensation sensor.
Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.
If there is window condensation, press the but‐
ton on the driver's side or switch on air condi‐
tioning to utilize the condensation sensor.
Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.
Rear window defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The function is available with the en‐
gine running.
The rear window defroster switches off auto‐
matically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air.
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous
pollutants from the outside air that enters the
vehicle.
Have this combined filter changed during vehi‐
cle maintenance, refer to page 305.
Ventilation
Concept
The air flow directions can be individually ad‐
justed.
Adjusting the ventilation
General information
The air flow directions can be adjusted for di‐
rect or indirect ventilation.
Seite 215
Climate control Controls
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Direct ventilation
The air flow is directed towards the passen‐
gers. The air flow heats or cools noticeably,
depending on the adjusted temperature.
Indirect ventilation
The air flow is not directed towards the pas‐
sengers. The car's interior is warmed or cooled
indirectly, depending on the set temperature.
Front ventilation
Overview
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 2.
Setting the temperature
The temperature of the ventilation in the upper
body area can be varied.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Temperature adjustment, upper body"
5. Set the desired temperature.
▷ Toward blue: colder.
▷ Toward red: warmer.
This does not change the set interior tempera‐
ture for the driver and front passenger.
Ventilation in rear, center
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 2.
Rear automatic climate
control
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Climate control functions
Button Function
Temperature, refer to
page 217.
AUTO program, refer to
page 217.
Air distribution, manual, refer to
page 217.
Seite 216
Controls Climate control
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Button Function
Switch off the system, refer to
page 217.
Seat heating, refer to page 91.
Climate control functions in detail
Switching on/off
Via iDrive
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Rear climate"
The rear automatic climate control is not ready
for operation if the automatic climate control is
switched off or if the function for defrosting the
windows and removing condensation is active.
Using the button: switching on
Press any button except for the following:
▷ OFF button.
▷ Seat heating.
Using the button: switching off
Press button.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed,
by using the maximum cooling or heating ca‐
pacity, and then keeps it constant.
Settings
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase tempera‐
ture.
The selected temperature is shown on the dis‐
play of the automatic climate control.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
AUTO program
Concept
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are
controlled automatically.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
program switched on.
Depending on the selected temperature and
outside influences, the air is directed to the up‐
per body and into the floor area.
The air conditioning is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
Controlling the air distribution
manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be
adjusted manually.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ Floor area.
Seite 217
Climate control Controls
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Parked-car ventilation
Concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the car's
interior. Depending on set temperature and
ambient temperature, the car's interior is
cooled or possibly heated using the residual
engine heat.
General information
The system can be switched on and off di‐
rectly or via a pre-set departure time.
The activation time is determined based on the
external temperature. The system promptly
switches on before the selected departure
time.
Functional requirements
▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state
and not in drive-ready state.
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the
vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus,
limit the maximum activation time to save
the vehicle battery. The system will be
available again after the engine is started or
after a short trip.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
General information
There are different ways to switch the system
on or off.
The system switches off automatically after a
certain period of time. The system continues
to run for some time after being switched off.
Using the button
When the vehicle is in standby state, the
parked-car ventilation can be switched on or
off via the automatic climate control buttons.
Press any button except:
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Left side of air flow button.
▷ Seat heating.
▷ SYNC program.
▷ MENU.
The system switches off after leaving and lock‐
ing the vehicle.
Via iDrive
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Comfort ventilation" or "Comfort heating/
ventilation"
5. "Activate now"
Via BMW display key
Switching on
1.
Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Precondit. setting"
3. Tap the symbol or the symbol.
4. "Activate now"
5. "Start"
Switching off
1.
Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Precondit. setting"
3. Tap the symbol or the symbol.
4. "Stop"
Seite 218
Controls Climate control
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Display
symbol on the automatic climate control in‐
dicates the system is switched on.
REST is displayed on the automatic climate
control. The residual engine heat is used.
Departure time
Different departure times can be adjusted to
ensure a comfortable interior temperature in
the vehicle at the time of departure.
▷ One-time departure time: the time can be
set.
The system is switched on once.
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
of the week can be set.
On the desired weekdays, the system will
be switched on promptly before the set de‐
parture time.
The departure time is preselected in two
steps:
▷ Set departure times.
▷ Activate departure times.
Setting the departure time
Via iDrive
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Comfort ventilation" or "Comfort heating/
ventilation"
5. Select the desired departure time.
6. Set the departure time.
7. Select day of the week, if needed.
Via BMW display key
1.
Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Precondit. setting"
3. Tap the symbol or the symbol.
4. Select the desired departure time.
5. Set the departure time.
6. Select day of the week, if needed.
7. "OK"
Activating the departure time
Functional requirement
If a departure time is to influence the switching
on of parked-car ventilation, the respective de‐
parture time must be activated first.
Via iDrive
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Comfort ventilation" or "Comfort heating/
ventilation"
5. "For departure time"
6. Activate the desired departure time.
, The symbol on the automatic climate
control signals an activated departure time
Via BMW display key
1.
Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Precondit. setting"
3. Tap the symbol or the symbol.
4. Tap on symbol.
5. Activate the desired departure time.
The symbol on the automatic climate
control signals an activated departure time.
Ambient air package
Concept
The Ambient Air Package can be used to clean
and scent the interior air with high-quality fra‐
grances.
Seite 219
Climate control Controls
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Ionization is used to clean the air from sus‐
pended particles. Together with the selected
fragrance, ionization contributes to well-being
and relaxation while driving.
General information
Two different fragrances can be selected in the
vehicle. A variety of other fragrances is possi‐
ble by replacing the fragrance cartridges.
The following criteria can influence the per‐
ception of scents in the car's interior:
▷ Automatic climate control settings.
▷ Temperature and air humidity.
▷ Time of day and season.
▷ Physical condition of the vehicle occu‐
pants, for instance fatigue.
BMW recommends the use of genuine BMW
fragrance cartridges.
The genuine BMW fragrance cartridges are not
suitable for refilling. When a cartridge is empty,
replace it with a new fragrance cartridge.
Safety information
WARNING
Refilled genuine BMW fragrance car‐
tridges can cause the emission of harmful sub‐
stances, malfunctions, and damage to the sys‐
tem. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Do not refill genuine fragrance car‐
tridges. When a cartridge is empty, replace it
with a new fragrance cartridge.◀
Ionization
Concept
Ionization cleans the car's interior air of sus‐
pended particles.
Switching on/off
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. If necessary, "Air quality"
5. "Ionization"
The climate control display indicates that ioni‐
zation is switched on.
Fragrancing
General information
Fragrancing is done at intervals in order to
avoid a habituation effect.
Two fragrance cartridges in the vehicle allow
switching between the fragrances.
The fragrance cartridges are located in the
glove compartment.
Functional requirements
▷ Fragrance cartridges are sufficiently filled.
▷ Interior temperature between 41 ℉/+5 ℃
and 104 ℉/+40 ℃.
▷ Open the vents to allow the fragrance to
flow out.
Selecting the fragrance
Two different fragrances can be selected in the
vehicle.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Fragrance"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Switching fragrancing on/off,
adjusting intensity
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
Seite 220
Controls Climate control
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Fragrance"
5. "Level"
6. Select the desired setting.
Display
The illustrations on the Control Display show
the actual filling level of the fragrance car‐
tridges.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Fragrance"
The fill level of the current fragrance is dis‐
played.
5. Select the desired setting.
When an empty fragrance cartridge is indi‐
cated, the cartridge still contains a fluid carry‐
ing the fragrance. However, it is not sufficient
for fragrancing.
When a fragrance cartridge requires replace‐
ment, a Check Control message is displayed
Inserting fragrance cartridges
The fragrance cartridges are located in the
glove compartment.
1.
Open the glove compartment, refer to
page 229.
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge
holder.
The cartridge holder slides down.
3. Remove the cover of the fragrance car‐
tridge. Hold the cover on the top to slide it
from the fragrance cartridge.
4. Insert the removed cover on the back side
of the fragrance cartridge.
Seite 221
Climate control Controls
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
5. Position fragrance cartridge such that the
chip faces away from the cartridge holder.
6. Insert the fragrance cartridge without pres‐
sure into the cartridge holder. The car‐
tridge snaps lightly into place.
7. Push the cartridge holder up, until it en‐
gages.
Make sure that no objects press against
the cartridge holder from below, otherwise
the function of the ambient air package
could be impacted.
8. Close the glove compartment.
Removing the fragrance cartridge
The fragrance cartridges are located in the
glove compartment.
1.
Open the glove compartment, refer to
page 229.
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge
holder.
The cartridge holder slides down.
3. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the
holder.
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 1: first fra‐
grance indicated on the Control Display.
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 2: second fra‐
grance indicated on the Control Display.
4. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the
holder.
Recycling
Empty fragrance cartridges can be
taken to a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop for recycling.
Seite 222
Controls Climate control
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Integrated Universal Remote
Control
Concept
The integrated Universal Remote Control in
the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func‐
tions of remote-controlled systems, such as
garage door drives, barriers, or lighting sys‐
tems.
General information
The Integrated Universal Remote Control re‐
places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters.
To operate the remote control, the buttons on
the interior mirror must be programmed with
the desired functions. The hand-held transmit‐
ter for the particular system is required in order
to program the remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, such as the
garage door, using the integrated Universal
Remote Control. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the area
of movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the owner's manual of the sys‐
tem to be controlled, the system is
generally compatible with the integrated Uni‐
versal Remote Control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Control elements on the interior mirror
▷ Buttons, arrow 1.
▷ LED, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
Programming
General information
1.
Switch on standby state.
2. Initial setup:
Seite 223
Interior equipment Controls
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Press and hold the two outer buttons on
the interior mirror simultaneously for ap‐
proximately 10 seconds until the LED
flashes green rapidly. This erases all pro‐
gramming of the buttons on the interior
mirror.
3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐
grammed. The LED flashes orange.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to
8 cm away from the buttons of the interior
mirror. The required distance depends on
the hand-held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter. The
LED on the interior mirror will begin flash‐
ing orange slowly.
6. As soon as the LED flashes green more
rapidly or lights up continuously, release
the button. Green light indicates that the
button on the interior mirror has been pro‐
grammed. Faster green flashing indicates
that it is a rolling code wireless system.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐
tween the interior mirror and the hand-held
transmitter and repeat the step. Several
more attempts at different distances may
be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds be‐
tween attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
7.
To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐
rior mirror buttons.
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after
repeated programming, please check if the
system to be controlled features a rolling code
radio system.
Read the system's owner's manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior mirror
longer. If the LED on the interior mirror starts
flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for
2 seconds, the system features a rolling code
radio system. Flashing and continuous illumi‐
nation of the LED will repeat for approximately
20 seconds.
For systems with a rolling code radio system,
the integrated Universal Remote Control and
the system also have to be synchronized.
Please read the owner's manual to find out
how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
ond person.
Synchronizing the universal remote control
with the system:
1.
Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You
have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds
and then release it. If necessary, repeat this
step up to three times in order to finish
synchronization. Once synchronization is
complete, the programmed function will be
carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Switch on standby state.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to
be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts
flashing slowly, hold the hand-held trans‐
mitter for the system to be controlled ap‐
prox. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the
buttons of the interior mirror. The required
Seite 224
Controls Interior equipment
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
distance depends on the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior mirror LED flashes more rapidly or
lights up continuously. The LED flashing
more rapidly or being continuously lit up in‐
dicates that the button on the interior mir‐
ror has been programmed. The system can
then be controlled by the button on the in‐
terior mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
most 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the programming starting with
step 4. Several more attempts at different
distances may be necessary. Wait at least
15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
Operation
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, such as the
garage door, using the integrated Universal
Remote Control. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the area
of movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior mirror
while the drive-ready or standby state is
switched on. To do this, hold down the button
within receiving range of the system until the
function is activated. The interior mirror LED
stays lit while the wireless signal is being
transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐
mately 10 seconds until the LED on the interior
mirror flashes green rapidly. All stored func‐
tions will be deleted. The functions cannot be
deleted individually.
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side
Folding out
1.
Fold the sun visor down.
2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to
the side.
Folding up
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun
visor.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the
mirror lighting switches on.
Seite 225
Interior equipment Controls
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Ashtray
Front center console
Opening
1. Slide the cover forward.
2. The ashtray is located in a cup holder. Fold
the ashtray cover upward.
Emptying
Pull the ashtray with the closed cover out of
the cup holder.
Cigarette lighter
Safety information
WARNING
Contact with the hot heating element or
the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can
cause burns. Flammable materials can ignite if
the cigarette lighter falls down or is held
against the respective objects. There is a risk
of fire and injuries. Take hold of the cigarette
lighter by its handle. Make sure that children
do not use the cigarette lighter and burn them‐
selves.◀
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
damage to property. Replace the cigarette
lighter or socket cover again after using the
socket.◀
Front center console
Slide the cover forward.
The cigarette lighter is located between the
cup holders.
Seite 226
Controls Interior equipment
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Operation
Push in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be re‐
moved as soon as it pops back
out.
Sockets
Concept
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment when standby and drive-
ready state are switched on.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Safety information
WARNING
Devices and cables in the unfolding area
of the airbags, such as portable navigation de‐
vices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or
be thrown around in the car's interior during
unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that devices and cables are not in the airbag's
area of unfolding.◀
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
a risk of damage to property. Only connect
battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
damage to property. Replace the cigarette
lighter or socket cover again after using the
socket.◀
Front center console
Slide the cover forward.
A socket is located between the cup holders.
Pull off the cover.
Rear center console
A socket is located in the center console.
Seite 227
Interior equipment Controls
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Pull off the cover.
In the cargo area
A socket is located on the right side in the
cargo area. Unfold the cover.
USB interface
General information
Follow the information regarding the connec‐
tion of mobile devices to the USB interface in
the section on USB connections, refer to
page 46.
In the center armrest
A USB interface is located in the center arm‐
rest.
In the center console
NOTE
Objects in the storage compartment,
e.g., large USB connectors, may block or dam‐
age the cover when it is being opened or
closed. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
cover is clear while opening and closing it.◀
Slide the cover forward.
A USB interface is located in the center con‐
sole.
Seite 228
Controls Interior equipment
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Safety information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose ob‐
jects or devices with a cable connection to the
vehicle in the car's interior.◀
NOTE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the car's interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 229.
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side,
refer to page 230.
▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 230.
▷ Storage compartment in the center con‐
sole, refer to page 230.
▷ Center armrest, refer to page 231.
▷ Storage compartment in the rear center
console, refer to page 230.
▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front
seats.
Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Safety information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
glove compartment can be thrown into the
car's interior while driving, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Al‐
ways close the glove compartment immedi‐
ately after using it.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
Seite 229
Storage compartments Controls
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Locking
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key. This prevents access to the
glove compartment.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over without the
integrated key, for instance when the vehicle is
parked by valet parking.
Driver's side
Safety information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
glove compartment can be thrown into the
car's interior while driving, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Al‐
ways close the glove compartment immedi‐
ately after using it.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Compartments in the doors
WARNING
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles
or glasses, can break in the event of an acci‐
dent or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken
glass can be scattered in the car's interior.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. Do not use any breakable objects
while driving. Only stow breakable objects in
closed storage compartments.◀
Storage compartment in the
center console
Opening
Slide the cover forward.
Closing
Slide the cover rearward.
Storage compartment in the
rear center console
The rear center console contains one or two
storage compartments.
Seite 230
Controls Storage compartments
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Center armrest
Front
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Opening
Press button.
Closing
Press cover down until it engages.
Cup holders
Safety information
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
and increase the risk of injury in the event of an
accident. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Use light-weight, un‐
breakable, and sealable containers. Do not
transport hot beverages. Do not force objects
into the cup holder.◀
Front
Opening
Slide the cover forward.
Two cup holders are located in the center con‐
sole.
Closing
Slide the cover rearward.
Rear
Safety information
NOTE
With an open cup holder, the center arm‐
rest cannot be folded back up. There is a risk
of damage to property. Press back the covers
before the center armrest is folded up.◀
Opening
1.
Fold the center armrest forward.
Seite 231
Storage compartments Controls
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
2. Press button.
Closing
Press both covers inward back against each
other.
Clothes hooks
Safety information
WARNING
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks
can obstruct the view while driving. There is a
risk of an accident. When suspending clothing
articles from the clothes hooks, ensure that
they will not obstruct the driver's view.◀
WARNING
Improper use of the clothes hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury and risk of damage to property. Only
hang lightweight objects, for instance clothing
articles, from the clothes hooks.◀
General information
The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐
dles in the rear.
Seite 232
Controls Storage compartments
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Cargo area
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Loading
Safety information
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them internally and cause a sudden
drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving charac‐
teristics may be negatively impacted, reducing
lane stability, lengthening the braking distan‐
ces and changing the steering response.
There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to
the permitted load capacity of the tires and
never exceed the permitted gross weight.◀
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose ob‐
jects or devices with a cable connection to the
vehicle in the car's interior.◀
WARNING
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
be thrown into the car's interior, for instance in
the event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be
hit and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow
and secure objects and cargo properly.◀
NOTE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐
age. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo
area.◀
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400–750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Seite 233
Cargo area Controls
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as
possible, directly behind and at the bottom
of the rear passenger seat backrests.
When the rear seat is not occupied, secure
each of the outer safety belts in the oppo‐
site buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with
ratchet straps or with a cargo net or draw
straps.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
General information
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing
straps, retaining straps, draw straps or cargo
nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Fixed lashing eyes
There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area
for securing cargo.
The front lashing eyes are located under cov‐
ers.
Movable lashing eyes
To secure the cargo there are additional mova‐
ble lashing eyes in the cargo area.
The lashing eyes may be located underneath
the cargo floor panel. The lashing eyes can be
inserted into the openings in the rails.
Seite 234
Controls Cargo area
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
To slide the lashing eyes, press the button, ar‐
row 1. Make sure that the lashing eyes latch at
the new position.
Storage compartments in the
cargo area
Multi-function hook
General information
A multi-function hook is located on the left or
right side in the cargo area.
Safety information
WARNING
Improper use of the multi-function hooks
can lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers, for example.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property. Only hang lightweight objects,
such as shopping bags, from the multi-func‐
tion hooks. Only transport heavy luggage in
the cargo area if it has been appropriately se‐
cured.◀
Folding down
Press on the multi-function hook and turn until
it engages.
Retaining function for the cargo floor
panel
If the vehicle equipment does not include the
storage compartment package, the cargo floor
panel can be hooked onto the right-hand
multi-function hook.
1.
Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel
forward.
2. Lift the cargo floor panel up until it is over
the multi-function hook.
Seite 235
Cargo area Controls
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
3. Fold down the multi-function hook, refer to
page 235.
4. Lower the cargo floor panel, arrow 1, until it
is resting on the multi-function hook, ar‐
row 2.
Retaining strap
A retaining strap is available on the left side
trim for fastening small objects.
Net
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the
left side.
Left side storage compartment
General information
A storage compartment is located on the left
side in the cargo area.
Opening
Pull the handle.
Storage compartment on the right
side
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, a stor‐
age compartment is located on the right side.
Opening
Pull the handle.
Storage compartment below cargo
floor panel
General information
There is a storage compartment under the
cargo floor panel.
Fold up the cargo floor panel.
Enlarging the cargo area
Concept
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
down the rear seat backrest.
Seite 236
Controls Cargo area
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
40–20–40. The side rear seat backrests and
the center section can be folded down sepa‐
rately.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the rear
seat backrests can be folded down from the
rear or from the cargo area.
Safety information
WARNING
Danger of jamming with folding down the
backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest and the of the
head restraint is clear prior to folding down.◀
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, un‐
secured cargo can be thrown into the car's in‐
terior; for instance, in the event of an accident,
braking or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk
of injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest
is locked after folding it back.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged or
locked. If possible, adjust the height of the
head restraints or remove them.◀
WARNING
Once the rear seat backrest has been
folded down, the locking bracket protrudes
into the car's interior. There is a risk of damage
to property. When the rear seat backrest is
folded down, pay attention to the protruding
locking bracket and keep this area unob‐
structed.◀
NOTE
Vehicle parts can be damaged when
folding down the rear backrest. There is a risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the area
of movement of the rear backrest including
head restraint is clear when folding down.◀
Folding down the rear seat backrest
from the rear
Pull the lever and fold the rear seat backrest
forward.
Folding down the rear seat backrest
from the cargo area
Pull the lever inside the cargo area.
Left lever: the left and center rear seat back‐
rests fold forward.
Right lever: the right rear seat backrest folds
forward.
Seite 237
Cargo area Controls
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Fold down the center section
1. Fold down the center head restraint.
2. Press the switch and pull the center sec‐
tion forward.
Cargo cover
Safety information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose ob‐
jects or devices with a cable connection to the
vehicle in the car's interior.◀
WARNING
A cargo cover that snaps back quickly
can jam body parts or cause damage. There is
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Do not let the cargo cover snap back into
place.◀
NOTE
A cargo cover hooked in incorrectly can
cause damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Hook the cargo cover on both
sides.◀
Closing
Pull out the cargo cover, arrow 1, and hook
both sides into the brackets, arrow 2.
Removing
The cover can be removed to load bulky lug‐
gage.
Press the release button, arrow 1, and pull the
cargo cover out toward the rear, arrow 2.
The cargo cover can be stowed in the storage
compartment under the cargo floor panel.
Installing
Slide the cover forward horizontally into the
two side brackets. Make sure that the cover
audibly engages on both sides.
Cargo area partition net
General information
The cargo area partition net can be installed in
two different positions in the vehicle.
Seite 238
Controls Cargo area
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
With the rear seat backrest folded
down
1. Fold down the rear seat backrests, refer to
page 236.
2. Open the front lids up on the roof frame
until they engage.
3. Insert each of the two top retaining pins of
the cargo area partition net into the recep‐
tacles until they reach the stop, arrow 1,
and push them forward.
4. Attach the cargo area partition net with the
lower two hooks into the two eyes on the
folded-down rear seat backrest, arrows 2.
You may need to lift the rear seat backrests
slightly in order to do this.
With the rear seat backrest upright
1. Remove the cargo cover, refer to
page 238.
2. Open the rear lids up on the roof frame un‐
til they engage.
3. Insert each of the two top retaining pins of
the cargo area partition net into the recep‐
tacles until they reach the stop, arrow 1,
and push them forward.
4. Attach the cargo area partition net with the
upper two hooks into the two eyes on the
rear seat backrest, arrows 2.
Ski and snowboard bag
The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a
protective jacket in the cargo area.
Follow the installation and owner's manual in‐
cluded in the protective jacket.
If equipped with emergency wheel: remove the
emergency wheel from the vehicle to mount
the ski and snowboard bag.
Seite 239
Cargo area Controls
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to begin working together
smoothly.
The following instructions will help you to ach‐
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐
trol, refer to page 114.
Safety information
WARNING
Due to new parts and components,
safety and driver assistance systems can react
with a delay. There is a risk of an accident. Af‐
ter installing new parts or with a new vehicle,
drive conservatively and intervene early if nec‐
essary. Observe the break-in procedures of
the respective parts and components.◀
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
▷ For diesel engine 3,500 rpm and
93 mph/150 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
Drive moderately during this break-in period.
Following part replacement
Observe the break-in procedures again, if
components mentioned above are replaced.
Driving on poor roads
Concept
Because of its greater ground clearance, the
vehicle can be driven on a variety of road types
and qualities.
All-wheel drive can help improve forward mo‐
mentum.
Seite 242
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Safety information
NOTE
Objects in unpaved areas, for instance
stones or branches, can damage the vehicle.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
drive on unpaved terrain.◀
When driving on poor roads
For your own safety, for the safety of passen‐
gers and of the vehicle, heed the following
points:
▷ Become familiar with the vehicle before
starting a trip; do not take risks while driv‐
ing.
▷ Adjust the speed to the road surface con‐
ditions. The steeper and more uneven the
road surface, the slower the speed should
be.
▷ When driving on steep uphill or downhill
grades: add engine oil and coolant up to
near the MAX mark. Uphill and downhill
grades can be traveled up to no more than
50 %.
▷ On steep downhill grades, use Hill Descent
Control HDC.
Starting out is possible on uphill grades up
to 30 %. The permissible side tilt is 30 %.
▷ Avoid that the chassis bottom coming in
contact with the ground.
The ground clearance is no more than
7.8 inches/20 cm and can vary according
to the vehicle's load.
▷ When wheels continue to spin, depress the
accelerator so that driving stability control
systems can distribute the driving force to
the wheels. Activate DTC Dynamic Trac‐
tion Control if available.
After a trip on poor roads
After a trip on poor roads, check wheels and
tires for damage to maintain driving safety.
Clear heavy soiling from the body.
General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
Safety information
WARNING
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐
cle and can endanger occupants and other
traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter
the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Do not drive with the
tailgate open.◀
Driving with the tailgate open
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust gas system
WARNING
During driving operation, high tempera‐
tures can occur underneath the vehicle body,
for instance caused by the exhaust gas sys‐
tem. If combustible materials, such as leaves
or grass, come in contact with hot parts of the
exhaust gas system, these materials can ignite.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. Do not remove the heat shields in‐
stalled and never apply undercoating to them.
Make sure that no combustible materials can
come in contact with hot vehicle parts in driv‐
ing operation, idle or during parking. Do not
touch the hot exhaust gas system.◀
Exhaust gas particulate filter
The exhaust gas particulate filter collects soot
particles. The soot particles are burned at high
temperatures to clean the exhaust gas particu‐
late filter as necessary.
Seite 243
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
During several minutes of cleaning the follow‐
ing may occur:
▷ Temporarily, the engine may run less
smoothly.
▷ Noises and a slight amount of smoke com‐
ing from the exhaust gas system, even af‐
ter the engine is switched off.
▷ A somewhat higher engine speed is neces‐
sary to reach usual performance.
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
WARNING
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones
can influence one another. There is radiation
due to the transmission operations of mobile
phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. If possible, in the car's interior
use only mobile phones with direct connec‐
tions to an exterior antenna in order to exclude
mutual interference and deflect the radiation
from the car's interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
General information
When driving through water, follow the follow‐
ing:
▷ Drive through calm water only.
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
than maximum 19.6 inches/50 cm.
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Safety information
NOTE
When driving too quickly through too
deep water, water can enter into the engine
compartment, the electrical system or the
transmission. There is a risk of damage to
property. When driving through water, do not
exceed the maximum indicated water level and
the maximum speed for driving through wa‐
ter.◀
Braking safely
General information
The vehicle is equipped with the Antilock
Brake System ABS as a standard feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations that
require such.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
fort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that the Antilock
Brake System ABS is in its active mode.
In certain braking situations, the perforated
brake discs can emit functional noises. How‐
ever, functional noises have no effect on the
performance and operational reliability of the
brake.
Objects in the area around the pedals
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
Seite 244
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain,
gently press the brake pedal every few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other traffic.
The heat generated during braking dries brake
discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
General information
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear that requires least braking effort. Other‐
wise, the brakes may overheat and reduce
brake efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
if needed.
Safety information
WARNING
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out
and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk
of an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress
on the brake system.◀
WARNING
In idle state or with the engine switched
off, safety-relevant functions, for instance en‐
gine braking effect, braking force boost and
steering assistance, are restricted or not avail‐
able at all. There is a risk of an accident. Do not
drive in idle state or with the engine switched
off.◀
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
tion on the brake pads are increased by the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
sponse - generally this cannot be corrected.
Condensation water under the parked
vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops and collects un‐
derneath the vehicle.
Roof-mounted luggage rack
General information
Installation only possible with roof rack.
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Mounting
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the
vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they
have a major effect on vehicle handling and
steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
Seite 245
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass
sunroof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance
using ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
Driving on racetracks
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
This wear is not covered by the warranty. The
vehicle is not designed for use in motor sports
competition.
Seite 246
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Trailer towing
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
The permissible trailer loads, axle loads, draw‐
bar node weights, and the permissible gross
vehicle weight are specified in the technical
data.
The vehicle is equipped with an enhanced sus‐
pension system on the rear axle and, depend‐
ing on the vehicle type, with a more powerful
cooling system.
Before driving
Drawbar nose weight
The maximum load of the tractor is lowered by
the weight of the trailer hitch and the drawbar
nose weight. The drawbar nose weight in‐
creases the vehicle weight. Do not exceed the
approved gross vehicle weight of the towing
vehicle.
Loading
Distribute cargo as evenly as possible on the
cargo area.
Stow the load as low and close to the trailer
axle as possible. A low center of gravity in the
trailer increases the driving safety of the entire
vehicle-trailer combination.
Do not exceed the approved gross vehicle
weight of the trailer and the permissible trailer
load of the vehicle. The smaller value applies in
each case.
Tire inflation pressure
Note the tire inflation pressure of the vehicle
and trailer.
For the vehicle, the tire inflation pressure for
higher loads applies.
Information regarding the tire inflation pres‐
sure, refer to page 268.
For the trailer, the specifications of the manu‐
facturer apply.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
After correcting the tire inflation pressure or
hitching/unhitching a trailer, initialize the runflat
tires, refer to page 288.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
After correcting the tire inflation pressure or
hitching/unhitching a trailer, reset the Tire
Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to page 281.
Exterior mirrors
Exterior mirrors, which allow the driver to see
both rear corners of the trailer, are available as
special accessories from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Power consumption
Before starting to drive, check the function of
the trailer tail lights.
The consumption of the trailer tail lights must
not exceed the following values:
▷ Turn signals/brake lights: 54 watts per
side.
▷ Rear lights: 100 watts in total.
Seite 247
Trailer towing Driving tips
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ Backup light: 54 watts in total.
Keep the activation times of the electronic sys‐
tems/power consumers short when towing a
camper to save the vehicle battery power.
Towing a trailer
General information
If the trailer socket is in use, some driver assis‐
tance systems are unavailable, or available to a
limited extent. A Check Control message is
displayed where applicable.
When driving with a trailer or load carrier and
the trailer socket not in use, some driver assis‐
tance systems may have functional limitations
or may malfunction.
To prevent malfunctions, activate trailer tow‐
ing, refer to page 249.
Safety information
WARNING
Depending on the design and loading of
trailers, they may begin swinging at speeds ex‐
ceeding approx. 50 mph/80 km/h. There is a
risk of accidents or risk of damage to property.
Adapt your speed when driving with a trailer.
Immediately brake in the case of swinging. Ap‐
ply necessary steering corrections as carefully
as possible.◀
WARNING
The tire inflation pressure must be ad‐
justed to the increased axle load in trailer tow‐
ing. Driving with too low tire inflation pressure
can damage the tires. There is a risk of acci‐
dents or risk of damage to property. Do not ex‐
ceed a speed of 60 mph / 100 km/h. Increase
the tire inflation pressure of the towing vehicle
by 0.2 bar. Note the maximum possible tire in‐
flation pressure indicated on the tire.◀
Uphill grades
General information
In the interest of safety and to avoid hindering
the smooth flow of traffic, the towing of trailers
is permissible on uphill grades up to 12 %.
If higher trailer loads are approved at a later
point in time, the gradient limit is 8 %.
Starting on uphill grades
The parking brake is Automatically released
when the accelerator pedal is activated.
In order to prevent rolling back during starting,
use the parking brake.
1. Pull and release switch before start‐
ing off.
The parking brake is set.
2. Accelerated enough to start off.
Hills
A vehicle-trailer combination has the tendency
to swing more readily on hills.
Manually shift down to the next lower gear be‐
fore driving on a hill and drive downhill slowly.
High loads and external temperatures
NOTE
On long trips with heavy trailer loads,
high external temperatures and low tank con‐
tent, the fuel system can overheat, which re‐
duces the engine performance. There is a risk
of damage to property. Refuel promptly. On
long trips with heavy trailer loads and high ex‐
ternal temperatures, ensure that the fuel tank
is more than 1/4 full.◀
Seite 248
Driving tips Trailer towing
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Trailer stabilization control
Concept
This system supports the driver in stopping
the swinging of a trailer.
The trailer stabilization control detects swing‐
ing and automatically brakes the vehicle
quickly to leave the critical speed range and
stabilize the vehicle-trailer combination.
General information
If the trailer power socket is in use but a trailer
has not been hitched, the system can become
active in certain driving situations, such as
when using a bicycle rack with lighting.
Functional requirement
The system is functional at speeds beginning
at approx. 40 mph/65 km/h while a trailer is be‐
ing towed and the trailer power socket is in
use.
System limits
The system cannot intervene or not intervene
in time in the following situations, for instance:
▷ If a trailer jackknifes suddenly, for instance
on slippery roads or loose surfaces.
▷ If a trailer with a high center of gravity tilts,
before swinging is detected.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐
vated or has malfunctioned.
Activating trailer towing
Concept
Activating trailer towing prevents driver assis‐
tance systems from malfunctioning, as they
can do when driving with a trailer or load carrier
and the trailer socket not in use.
Activating trailer towing
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. Activate trailer towing.
Mount for trailer hitch
General information
The mount for the trailer hitch is located on the
rear of the vehicle.
Information on suitable trailer hitches is found
on the underside of the mount, see arrow.
Follow the Maintenance Instructions, refer to
page 325.
Safety information
WARNING
During driving operation, high tempera‐
tures can occur underneath the vehicle body,
for instance caused by the exhaust gas sys‐
tem. Contact with the hot components can
cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Do not
touch hot components. Do not perform work in
the vicinity of hot components until after they
have cooled down.◀
Seite 249
Trailer towing Driving tips
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Removing the cover
Pull the cover out of the back of the mount,
and stow it in the vehicle.
Trailer connector
The socket is located to the left of the mount
for the trailer hitch.
Fittings for trailer safety chain
There are two fittings on the mount for the
trailer hitch for securing the trailer safety chain.
Secure the trailer safety chain to the fittings for
increased safety when driving with a trailer.
Ensure that the trailer safety chain can move
freely and is not dragging on the ground.
Brake Controller
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a Brake Controller installed by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Information on installing a Brake Controller can
be obtained from a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 250
Driving tips Trailer towing
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
The vehicle contains advanced technologies
for the reduction of fuel consumption and
emission values.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐
erate driving style and regular maintenance,
can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐
ronmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted or rear
luggage racks which are no longer required fol‐
lowing use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass
sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
raises fuel consumption.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, for instance tire size may influence fuel
consumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the quickest way of warming the cold
engine up to operating temperature.
Look well ahead when
driving
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Seite 251
Saving fuel Driving tips
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Avoid high engine speeds
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con‐
sumption and reduces wear.
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift
indicator, refer to page 125.
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to
a halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
erator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switching off the engine
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for
instance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in
traffic congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle au‐
tomatically switches off the engine during a
stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐
onds of switching off the engine.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐
mined by other factors, such as driving style,
road conditions, maintenance or environmental
factors.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
increase fuel consumption, especially in city
and stop-and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not
needed.
The ECO PRO driving mode supports the en‐
ergy conserving use of comfort features.
These functions are automatically deactivated
partially or completely.
Have maintenance carried
out
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to ach‐
ieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life.
BMW recommends that maintenance work be
performed by a BMW dealer’s service center.
For information on the BMW Maintenance
System, refer to page 305.
ECO PRO
Concept
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
gine control and comfort features, for instance
the climate control output, are adjusted.
Steptronic transmission: under certain condi‐
tions the engine is automatically decoupled
from the transmission in the D selector lever
position. The vehicle continues traveling with
the engine idling to reduce fuel consumption.
The D selector lever position remains en‐
gaged.
In addition, context-sensitive information, ECO
PRO tips, are displayed to assist with an opti‐
mized fuel consumption driving style.
Seite 252
Driving tips Saving fuel
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
The achieved extended range is displayed in
the instrument cluster as bonus range.
General information
The system includes the following
EfficientDynamics functions and
EfficientDynamics displays:
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 254.
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to
page 253.
▷ Coasting driving condition, refer to
page 255.
▷ Driving style analysis, refer to page 256.
Overview
Button
Activating ECO PRO
Press button. ECO PRO is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
Opening via the Driving Dynamics
Control
1.
Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
Opening via iDrive
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Driving Experience Control"
4. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Activating/deactivating ECO PRO
functions
The following ECO PRO functions can be acti‐
vated/deactivated:
▷ "ECO PRO speed warning"
▷ "Coasting"
▷ "ECO PRO seat climate control"
▷ "ECO PRO climate control"
▷ "ECO PRO sight"
Settings are stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
ECO PRO limit
▷ Activate the ECO PRO limit:
"ECO PRO speed warning"
An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed
of the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded.
▷ Adjust the ECO PRO limit speed:
"Tip at:"
Select the desired speed.
Coasting
Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐
ing the engine and coasting with the engine
idling.
Deactivate the function to use the braking ef‐
fect of the engine when traveling downhill.
ECO PRO seat climate control
The output of seat heating and, where applica‐
ble, seat ventilation is reduced when ECO PRO
is activated.
ECO PRO climate control
Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
Seite 253
Saving fuel Driving tips
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
That is, it is possible to deviate slightly from
the set temperature or to heat or cool the car's
interior more slowly, to economize on fuel con‐
sumption.
The mirror heating is made available when ex‐
ternal temperatures are very cold.
ECO PRO Sight
The output of exterior mirror heating and rear
window defroster is reduced.
Resetting the settings
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
settings:
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"
Display in the instrument cluster
General information
When ECO PRO driving mode is activated, the
display switches to a special configuration.
Some of the displays may differ from the dis‐
play in the instrument cluster.
ECO PRO bonus range
A modified driving style helps
you extend your driving range.
This may be displayed as the
bonus range in the instrument
cluster.
The bonus range is shown in the range display.
Depending on the equipment, the blue bar
segments symbolize the gained range in
stages.
If the bonus range appears in gray, the current
driving style is inefficient.
The display turns blue as soon as all conditions
for driving with optimized fuel efficiency are
met.
The bonus range is automatically reset every
time the vehicle is refueled.
Fuel consumption display
Instrument cluster without enhanced
features
Instrument cluster with enhanced features
Information about the current driving style
A pointer in the fuel consumption display in‐
forms about the current driving style:
▷ The current fuel consumption in relation to
the average fuel consumption is displayed.
▷ Pointer in the area of arrow 1: display of the
energy recovered by coasting or when
braking.
▷ Pointer in the area of arrow 2: display when
accelerating.
If the acceleration is inefficient, the area be‐
tween the average fuel consumption and the
current fuel consumption is colored red.
In addition, the following information is dis‐
played, depending on the situation:
▷ Depending on the equipment: the total dis‐
tance driven while coasting, refer to
page 256.
Seite 254
Driving tips Saving fuel
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ The total time that the engine has been
switched off, refer to page 101, during au‐
tomatic engine stops.
▷ A gear shift indicator, refer to page 125,
recommending the use of a more fuel-effi‐
cient gear.
Indications on the Control Display
Displaying EfficientDynamics
information
The current efficiency of the ECO PRO func‐
tions can be displayed on the Control Display.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
4. Select the symbol.
The following functions are displayed:
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Coasting.
Displaying fuel consumption history
The following functions can be shown on the
Control Display:
▷ Average consumption.
▷ The distance traveled while coasting.
▷ The duration for which the Auto Start/Stop
function has switched off the engine.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
4. Select the symbol.
Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐
lected route.
Selecting route length
Via iDrive:
1.
Press button.
2. Select desired route length or scaling.
Resetting fuel consumption history
Via iDrive:
1.
Press button.
2. "Reset consumption history"
Coasting
Concept
The function helps to conserve fuel.
To do this, under certain conditions the engine
is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐
sion when selector lever position D is set. The
vehicle continues traveling with the engine
idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector
lever position D remains engaged.
This driving condition is referred to as coast‐
ing.
As soon as you step on the brake or accelera‐
tor pedal, the engine is automatically coupled
again.
General information
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO driv‐
ing mode.
Coasting is automatically activated when ECO
PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
Control.
A proactive driving style helps the driver to use
the function often and supports the fuel-con‐
serving effect of coasting.
Functional requirements
In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in
a speed range from approximately
Seite 255
Saving fuel Driving tips
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
30 mph/50 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h, if the
following conditions are met:
▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not
operated.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
Operation via shift paddles
Concept
The coasting driving condition can be influ‐
enced with the shift paddles.
Activating/deactivating coasting via shift
paddles
1.
Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right
shift paddle.
2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the
right shift paddle again.
To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.
Display
Instrument cluster without enhanced
features
The mark in the fuel consump‐
tion display below the tachome‐
ter is located at the zero point
and is backlit in blue. The tach‐
ometer approximately indicates
idle speed.
Instrument cluster with enhanced features
The mark in the fuel consump‐
tion display is located at the zero
point and is backlit in blue.
The distance traveled is indicated in
coasting mode.
Indications on the Control Display
The coasting mode is displayed in
EfficientDynamics while driving.
The distance traveled in coasting mode is
shown in the fuel consumption history. The
counter is reset with every refueling.
Color code blue: coasting mode.
Displaying EfficientDynamics information
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
System limits
The function is not available under one of the
following conditions.
▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on
steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low
or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐
sive current.
▷ Trailer towing.
Driving style analysis
Concept
The function helps develop an especially effi‐
cient driving style and to conserve fuel.
Seite 256
Driving tips Saving fuel
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
This display will help you adjust your driving
style and save some fuel.
General information
The current trip is assessed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips are displayed during driving.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by
adjusting your driving style.
This gain in range is displayed as a bonus
range in the instrument cluster and on the
Control Display.
Functional requirement
This function is available in ECO PRO mode.
Calling up ECO PRO driving style
analysis
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Driving style analysis"
Display on the Control Display
The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal‐
ysis consists of a symbolized route and a
lookup table.
The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐
ing style. The more efficient the driving style,
the smoother the depicted route becomes, ar‐
row 1.
The table of values contains stars. The more
efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐
cluded in the table, arrow 2, and the faster the
bonus range increases.
If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐
cient, a more wavy road and a reduced number
of stars are displayed.
Seite 257
Saving fuel Driving tips
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Refueling
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 262, prior to refueling.
In vehicles with a diesel engine, the filler neck
is designed for refueling at diesel fuel pumps.
Safety information
NOTE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property. Refuel promptly.◀
Fuel cap
Opening
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
Seite 260
Mobility Refueling
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Closing
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be
jammed and crushed during closing. The cap
cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors
can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Pay attention that the re‐
taining strap is not jammed or crushed when
closing the cap.◀
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction.
Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Follow the following when
refueling
General information
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com‐
pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel
pump nozzle during refueling causes:
▷ Premature switching off.
▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Follow safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
Safety information
NOTE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfill‐
ing of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys‐
tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged by
contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the
environment. There is a risk of damage to
property. Avoid overfilling.◀
Seite 261
Refueling Mobility
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Fuel recommendation
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in
winter, for instance helps make a cold start
easier.
Gasoline
General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐
tent.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.
Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐
dards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Safety information
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result
in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
NOTE
Do not press the Start/Stop button after
refueling with the wrong fuel. Furthermore, the
catalytic converter is permanently damaged.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
refuel or add the following in the case of gaso‐
line engines:
▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, for instance manganese
or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.◀
NOTE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and the engine. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not use fuels with a higher per‐
centage of ethanol than recommended. Do not
refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5
to M100.◀
Seite 262
Mobility Fuel
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
NOTE
Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
mum quality can compromise engine function
or cause engine damage. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not fill with fuel that
does not comply with the minimum quality.◀
Recommended fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high external temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Diesel
Safety information
NOTE
Do not press the Start/Stop button after
refueling with the wrong fuel. There is a risk of
damage to property.
Follow the following for diesel engines:
▷ Use only Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel.
▷ Do not refuel with pure methyl ester.
▷ Only refuel with biodiesel with a maximum
of B5/5 % according to ASTM D975.
▷ Do not use gasoline.
▷ The vehicle manufacturer recommends
only using diesel additives which have
been classified as suitable.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.◀
Low-Sulfur Diesel
The engine of your BMW is designed for diesel
with low sulfur content:
Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel ASTM D 975-xx.
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Use only Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel.
The fraction of biodiesel in the fuel must not
exceed 5 %, referred to as B5. Do not use gas‐
oline. If you do fill the tank with the wrong fuel,
for instance gasoline, do not start the engine
as this may damage the engine.
In the case of incorrect refueling, contact a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or Roadside As‐
sistance.
If the fuel pump nozzle does not fit in the filler
pipe of your BMW, please check to ensure that
you are refueling at a diesel fuel pump that is
equipped with a diesel fuel pump nozzle.
In the event the Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel fuel
cannot be fully inserted into the fuel filler neck,
please contact BMW Roadside Assistance for
instructions on how to add fuel. For more infor‐
mation on Roadside Assistance, refer to
page 316.
BMW Advanced Diesel
Concept
BMW Advanced Diesel reduces nitrogen ox‐
ides in the diesel emissions by injecting diesel
exhaust fluid into the exhaust system. A chem‐
ical reaction takes place inside the catalytic
converter that minimizes nitrogen oxides.
General information
The vehicle has a tank that must be refilled.
Seite 263
Fuel Mobility
263
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
To be able to establish the drive-ready state as
usual, there must be an adequate amount of
diesel exhaust fluid.
Diesel exhaust fluid can be refilled at any time.
Diesel exhaust fluid is available at many gas
stations.
If possible, refill diesel exhaust fluid using a
fuel pump, refer to page 265.
Diesel exhaust fluid at low
temperatures
Due to its physical properties, it is possible
that the diesel exhaust fluids may need to be
replenished more frequently if exposed to tem‐
peratures under +23 ℉/-5 ℃.
At temperatures below +12 ℉/-11 ℃, it may
only be possible to measure and display the
filling level after a short drive.
At low temperatures, add diesel exhaust fluid
only immediately before driving off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Reserve indication
This display in the instrument cluster provides
information about the distance that can still be
driven with the current reserve level.
Do not continue driving to the limit of the re‐
maining travel distance, otherwise it may not
be possible to activate the drive-ready state
again after switching off.
▷ Light white: refill with diesel
exhaust fluid at the next op‐
portunity.
▷ Light yellow: not enough
diesel exhaust fluid present.
The remaining range is dis‐
played in the instrument
cluster. Immediately refill
with Diesel exhaust fluid, re‐
fer to page 264.
Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum
The remaining range is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Add at least 10 liters of diesel
exhaust fluid. The engine will
continue to run as long as it is
not switched off and all other operating condi‐
tions are satisfied; sufficient fuel, for instance.
System malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed when
there is a system not working.
Visit the nearest dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Have the diesel exhaust fluid
replenished
BMW recommends that diesel exhaust fluid be
added by the dealer’s service center within the
course of regular maintenance.
In addition, it may be necessary to have the
fluid replenished several times between main‐
tenance appointments under particular cir‐
cumstances, for instance if the vehicle is
driven in a particularly sporty style or if it is op‐
erated with a trailer.
The diesel exhaust fluid must be replenished
as soon as the reserve display appears in the
instrument cluster to avoid not being able to
reestablish the drive-ready state.
Replenishing diesel exhaust fluid
yourself in exceptional cases
General information
You can replenish Diesel exhaust fluid yourself
in exceptional cases, for instance to get to your
scheduled service.
Seite 264
Mobility Fuel
264
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Safety information
WARNING
Small amounts of ammonia fumes can
escape when opening the diesel exhaust fluid
container. Ammonia fumes have a pungent
odor and irritate skin, mucous membranes, and
eyes. There is a risk of injury. Do not inhale es‐
caping ammonia fumes. Avoid the contact of
articles of clothing, skin or eyes with diesel ex‐
haust fluid. Do not swallow any diesel exhaust
fluid. Keep children away from diesel exhaust
fluids.◀
WARNING
Operating materials, for instance oils,
greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful
ingredients. There is a risk of injuries or danger
to life. Follow the instructions on the contain‐
ers. Avoid the contact of articles of clothing,
skin or eyes with operating materials. Do not
refill operating materials into different bottles.
Store operating materials out of reach of chil‐
dren.◀
NOTE
The diesel exhaust fluid ingredients are
very aggressive. There is a risk of damage to
property. Avoid contact of diesel exhaust fluid
with surfaces of the vehicle.◀
Suitable diesel exhaust fluid
▷ Recommended: BMW Diesel Exhaust
Fluid. With this bottle and its special
adapter, diesel exhaust fluid can be replen‐
ished simply and safely.
▷ Alternatively recommended: NOx Diesel
exhaust fluid AUS 32.
Diesel exhaust fluid can be purchased at a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Diesel exhaust fluid is available at many gas
stations at a separate fuel pump. If possible,
refill diesel exhaust fluid using a fuel pump.
Refill quantity
When the reserve display begins, add at least
1.3 US gal/5 liters.
Tank for diesel exhaust fluid
The fuel cap for diesel exhaust fluids is next to
the fuel cap for the fuel tank.
Adding diesel exhaust fluid at the fuel
pump
1.
Open the fuel filler flap, refer to page 260.
2. Turn the fuel cap of the diesel exhaust fluid
tank counterclockwise and remove.
3. Using the fuel pump nozzle, add at least
the recommended refilling quantity, refer
to page 265.
Seite 265
Fuel Mobility
265
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle
clicks off the first time.
4. Replace the fuel cap and turn it clockwise.
5. Close the fuel filler flap.
Adding diesel exhaust fluid using a
bottle
1.
Open the fuel filler flap, refer to page 260.
2. Turn the fuel cap of the diesel exhaust fluid
tank counterclockwise and remove.
3. Place the bottle on it and turn it clockwise
as far as it will go.
4. Press the bottle down.
The vehicle tank will be filled.
The tank is full when the fill level in the bot‐
tle no longer changes. It is not possible to
overfill.
5. Pull back the bottle and unscrew it.
6. Replace the fuel cap and turn it clockwise.
7. Close the fuel filler flap.
Filling with an incorrect fluid
General information
A Check Control message is displayed when
an incorrect fluid is added.
In the case that an incorrect fluid was refilled,
contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
After adding an incorrect fluid, for in‐
stance antifreeze for washer fluid, the system
can heat and ignite. There is a risk of fire and
injuries. Do not add incorrect fluids. Do not
start the engine after adding an incorrect
fluid.◀
Seite 266
Mobility Fuel
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
After filling diesel exhaust fluid
Reserve indication
The Reserve display will still ap‐
pear along with the remaining
range after refilling.
The drive-ready state can be es‐
tablished.
After several minutes of driving, the Reserve
indication goes out.
Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum
After filling, the indicator is still
displayed.
The drive-ready state can only
be established after the indica‐
tor goes out.
1.
Press the Start/Stop button three times.
The indicator goes out after approx. 1 mi‐
nute.
2. Press the Start/Stop button and establish
the drive-ready state.
Disposing of bottles
Have bottles for diesel exhaust fluid
disposed of by a dealer's service center
or another qualified service center or
repair shop or take them to a collection point.
Do not dispose of empty bottles with house‐
hold waste unless this is permitted by local
regulations.
Seite 267
Fuel Mobility
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Tire inflation pressure
General information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
▷ Fuel consumption.
Safety information
WARNING
A tire with too little or no tire inflation
pressure may heat up significantly and sustain
damage. This will have a negative impact on
aspects of handling, such as steering and
braking response. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐
sure, and correct it as needed, for instance
twice a month and before a long trip.◀
Tire inflation pressure specifications
In the tire inflation pressure table
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 269, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
On the Control Display
The current tire inflation pressure values and
the intended tire inflation pressure values for
the mounted tires can be displayed on the
Control Display.
To ensure that they are displayed correctly,
the tire sizes must be stored in the system and
must have been set, refer to page 281, for the
mounted tires.
The current tire inflation pressure value is lo‐
cated on each tire.
The intended tire inflation pressure value is lo‐
cated in the lower area of the Control Display.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
General information
Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation
pressure increases with the tire temperature.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐
flation pressure.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Checking using tire inflation pressure
specifications in the tire inflation
pressure table
The tire inflation pressure specifications in the
tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold
tires or tires at the same temperature as the
ambient temperature.
Seite 268
Mobility Wheels and tires
268
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels
when the tires are cold, i.e.:
▷ Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has
not been exceeded.
▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at
least 2 hours after a trip.
Check the tire inflation pressure of the emer‐
gency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and
correct it as needed.
1. Determine, refer to page 268, the intended
tire inflation pressure levels for the
mounted tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires, using a pressure gage, for example.
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the cur‐
rent tire inflation pressure value deviates
from the specified value.
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed
onto the tire valves.
Checking using the tire inflation
pressure specifications on the Control
Display
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Check whether the current tire inflation
pressure levels deviate from the intended
tire pressure value.
5. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the cur‐
rent tire inflation pressure value deviates
from the intended value.
After correcting the tire inflation
pressure
For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.
For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: in the case
of tires that are not included in the tire inflation
pressure specifications on the Control Display,
reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 269, and adjust as necessary.
These pressure values can also be found on
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's
door pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
X3 xDrive30i
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/60 R 18 104 H
M+S XL A/S RSC
225/60 R 18 104 H
M+S XL RSC
2.2 / 32 2.5 / 36
Seite 269
Wheels and tires Mobility
269
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
245/50 R 19 105 H
M+S XL A/S
Std/RSC
245/50 R 19 105
W XL RSC
245/50 R 19 105 V
M+S XL RSC
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
Front: 245/45 R 20
103 W XL RSC
2.2 / 32 -
Rear: 275/40 R 20
106 W XL RSC
- 2.4 / 35
Front: 245/45 R 20
103 Y XL Std
2.2 / 32 -
Rear: 275/40 R 20
106 Y XL Std
- 2.4 / 35
Front: 245/40 R 21
100 Y XL RSC
2.3 / 33 -
Rear: 275/35 R 21
103 Y XL RSC
- 2.6 / 38
Emergency wheel:
T 135/80 R 18 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
X3 M40i
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/50 R 19 105
H M+S XL A/S
Std/RSC
245/50 R 19 105
W XL RSC
245/50 R 19 105
V M+S XL RSC
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
Front: 245/45 R
20 103 W XL RSC
2.2 / 32 -
Rear: 275/40 R 20
106 W XL RSC
- 2.4 / 35
Front: 245/45 R
20 103 Y XL Std
2.2 / 32 -
Rear: 275/40 R 20
106 Y XL Std
- 2.4 / 35
Front:
245/40 R 21 100
Y XL RSC
2.3 / 33 -
Rear: 275/35 R 21
103 Y XL RSC
- 2.6 / 38
Emergency wheel:
T 135/80 R 18
104 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire inflation pressures at max.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
WARNING
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
Seite 270
Mobility Wheels and tires
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 271, and adjust as necessary.
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
X3 xDrive30i
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/60 R 18 104 H
M+S XL A/S RSC
225/60 R 18 104 H
M+S XL RSC
245/50 R 19 105 H
M+S XL A/S
Std/RSC
245/50 R 19 105
W XL RSC
245/50 R 19 105 V
M+S XL RSC
2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45
Front: 245/45 R 20
103 W XL RSC
2.7 / 39 -
Rear: 275/40 R 20
106 W XL RSC
- 3.1 / 45
Front: 245/45 R 20
103 Y XL Std
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 275/40 R 20
106 Y XL Std
- 2.7 / 39
Front: 245/40 R 21
100 Y XL RSC
2.6 / 38 -
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Rear: 275/35 R 21
103 Y XL RSC
- 2.9 / 42
Emergency wheel:
T 135/80 R 18 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
X3 M40i
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/50 R 19 105
H M+S XL A/S
Std/RSC
245/50 R 19 105
W XL RSC
245/50 R 19 105
V M+S XL RSC
2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45
Front: 245/45 R
20 103 W XL RSC
2.7 / 39 -
Rear: 275/40 R 20
106 W XL RSC
- 3.1 / 45
Front: 245/45 R
20 103 Y XL Std
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 275/40 R 20
106 Y XL Std
- 2.7 / 39
Front:
245/40 R 21 100
Y XL RSC
2.6 / 38 -
Seite 271
Wheels and tires Mobility
271
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Rear: 275/35 R 21
103 Y XL RSC
- 2.9 / 42
Emergency wheel:
T 135/80 R 18
104 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire identification marks
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Maximum tire load
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible
weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire side‐
wall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR
– on the certification label on the driver door B-
pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be
greater than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross
Axle Weight Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs.
rear GAWR and tire loads, respectively.
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
R = up to 106 mph/170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph/180 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3817
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
3817: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
Recommendation
Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at
least every 6 years.
Manufacture date
You can find the manufacture date of the tire
on the tire's sidewall.
Designation Manufacture date
DOT … 3817 38th week, 2017
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera‐
ture A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
Seite 272
Mobility Wheels and tires
272
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well
on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how‐
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris‐
tics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Mo‐
tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
Band A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 276, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased
risk of hydroplaning.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for
winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐
quired minimum height of 0.063 in‐
ches/1.6 mm.
The positions of the wear indicators are
marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread
Wear Indicator.
Seite 273
Wheels and tires Mobility
273
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations.
▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can be caused by the following situa‐
tions, for instance:
▷ Driving over curbs.
▷ Road damage.
▷ Tire inflation pressure too low.
▷ Vehicle overloading.
▷ Incorrect tire storage.
Safety information
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is a risk of an accident. If tire
damage is suspected while driving, immedi‐
ately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and
tires checked. For this purpose, drive carefully
to the nearest dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Have vehicle towed or transported as needed.
Do not repair damaged tires, but have them re‐
placed.◀
WARNING
Tires can become damaged by driving
over obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at
high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire
cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-sec‐
tion, the higher the risk of tire damage. There
is a danger of accidents and property damage.
If possible, drive around obstacles, or drive
over them slowly and carefully.◀
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting and wheel balancing
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
out by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Wheel and tire combination
General information
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
about the correct wheel/tire combination and
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Safety information
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐
cle, for instance due to contact with the body
due to tolerances despite the same official size
rating. There is a risk of an accident. The man‐
ufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests
that you use wheels and tires that have been
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for
your vehicle type.◀
WARNING
Mounted steel wheels can cause techni‐
cal problems, for instance independent loos‐
ening of the lug bolts, damage to the brake
discs. There is a risk of an accident. Do not
mount steel wheels.◀
Seite 274
Mobility Wheels and tires
274
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
WARNING
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will
have a negative impact on the vehicle's han‐
dling and on the function of a variety of sys‐
tems, such as ABS or DSC. There is a risk of
an accident. To maintain good handling and
vehicle response, use only tires with a single
tread configuration from a single manufacturer.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you use wheels and tires that have been
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for
your vehicle type. Following tire damage, have
the original wheel/tire combination remounted
on the vehicle as soon as possible.◀
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. The tire
brands can be identified by a star on the tire
sidewall.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
WARNING
Retreaded tires can have different tire
casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐
ice life can be limited. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
not recommend the use of retreaded tires.◀
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Winter tires
General information
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they usually do not provide the same level of
performance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then attach a label showing the permissible
maximum speed in the field of view. The label
is available from a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
With winter tires mounted, observe and do not
exceed the permissible maximum speed.
Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
own safety you should replace them only with
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
case of a flat tire. Further information is availa‐
ble from a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns can occur on the front
and rear axles depending on individual driving
conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs
between the axles to achieve even wear. Fur‐
ther information is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop. After rotating, check the tire
pressure and correct, if needed.
Seite 275
Wheels and tires Mobility
275
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehi‐
cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the
front and rear axles.
Storing tires
Air pressure
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark
place.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease, and solvents.
Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
Run-flat tires
Concept
Run-flat tires permit continued driving under
restricted conditions even in the event of a
complete loss of tire inflation pressure.
General information
The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐
porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐
cial rims.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to
remain drivable to a restricted degree in the
event of a tire inflation pressure loss.
Follow the instructions for continued driving
with a flat tire.
Safety information
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a
run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
duced, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is a
risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
WARNING
Heavy trailers can start swinging when
continuing to drive with a flat tire. There is a
risk of accidents or risk of damage to property.
Do not exceed a speed of 35 mph/60 km/h
when driving with a trailer and a flat tire. Imme‐
diately brake in the case of swinging. Apply
necessary steering corrections as carefully as
possible.◀
Label
The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with
RSC Run-flat System Component.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
Seite 276
Mobility Wheels and tires
276
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Mobility System
Concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed temporarily to enable continued
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
into the tires, which seals the damage from the
inside.
General information
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire. Only remove
foreign objects if they are visibly protruding
from the tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering
wheel.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the
electronics checked and replaced at the
next opportunity.
▷ The compressor can be used to check the
tire inflation pressure.
Overview
Storage
The Mobility System is located in the compart‐
ment under the cargo floor panel.
Fold up the cargo floor panel.
Sealant container
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
Compressor
1 Sealant container unlocking
2 Sealant container holder
Seite 277
Wheels and tires Mobility
277
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
3 Tire pressure gage
4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Filling the tire with sealant
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain pollutants which are colorless and odor‐
less. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation.◀
NOTE
The compressor can overheat during ex‐
tended operation. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 minutes.◀
Filling
1. Shake the sealant container.
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover
of the sealant container. Do not kink the
hose.
3. Slide the sealant container into the holder
on the compressor housing, ensuring that
it engages audibly.
Seite 278
Mobility Wheels and tires
278
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer onto the tire valve of the nonworking
wheel.
5. With the compressor switched off, insert
the plug into the power socket inside the
vehicle.
6. With standby state switched on or the en‐
gine running, switch on the compressor.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to
fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire infla‐
tion pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compres‐
sor at this point.
Checking and adjusting the tire
inflation pressure
Checking
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
pressure gage.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of
at least 2 bar must be reached.
Removing and stowing the sealant
container
1.
Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer from the tire valve.
2. Press the red unlocking device.
3. Remove the sealant container from the
compressor.
4. Wrap and store the sealant container in
suitable material to avoid dirtying the cargo
area.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is not
reached
1.
Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
3. Screw the connection hose of the com‐
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
Seite 279
Wheels and tires Mobility
279
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
4. Insert the connector into the power socket
inside the vehicle.
5. With standby state switched on or the en‐
gine running, switch on the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar
cannot be reached, contact your dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is
reached, see Minimum tire inflation pres‐
sure is reached.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
7. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is
reached
1.
Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
2. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to
ensure that the sealant is evenly distrib‐
uted in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
Adjustment
1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the com‐
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
3. Insert the connector into the power socket
inside the vehicle.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at
least 2.0 bar.
▷ Increase tire inflation pressure: with
standby state switched on or the en‐
gine running, switch on the compres‐
sor.
▷ Reduce tire inflation pressure: press
the button on the compressor.
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
6. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the run-flat tires, refer to page 288.
Seite 280
Mobility Wheels and tires
280
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to
page 281.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System promptly.
Snow chains
Safety information
WARNING
With the mounting of snow chains on un‐
suitable tires, the snow chains can come into
contact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or risk of damage to property. Only
mount snow chains on tires that are desig‐
nated by their manufacturer as suitable for the
use of snow chains.◀
WARNING
Insufficiently tight snow chains may
damage tires and vehicle components. There
is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Make sure that the snow chains are al‐
ways sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed
according to the snow chain manufacturer's in‐
structions.◀
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 225/60 R 18.
▷ 245/50 R 19.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Do not initialize the run-flat tires after mount‐
ing snow chains, as doing so may result in in‐
correct readings.
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
after mounting snow chains, as doing so may
result in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control DTC to optimize the
forward momentum.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
the four mounted tires. The system warns you
if there is a loss of pressure in one or more
tires.
General information
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire in‐
flation pressure and tire temperature.
Using the tire settings in iDrive, the system can
automatically display the specified target pres‐
sures and compare them with the actual tire in‐
flation pressures.
If tires are being used that are not specified on
the tire inflation pressure details on the vehicle,
refer to page 268, such as tires with special
approval, the system needs to be actively re‐
set. The system will then take over the actual
tire inflation pressures as the target pressures.
When operating the system, also note the ad‐
ditional information found in the Tire inflation
pressure, refer to page 268, chapter.
Seite 281
Wheels and tires Mobility
281
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Safety information
WARNING
The display of the target pressures is not
a substitute for the tire inflation pressure de‐
tails on the vehicle. Incorrect entries in the tire
settings can lead to incorrect target tire infla‐
tion pressure values. In this case, it cannot be
guaranteed that the notification of a loss of tire
inflation pressure will be reliable. There is a risk
of injury and risk of damage to property. En‐
sure that the tire sizes of the mounted tires are
entered correctly and match the details on the
tires and on the vehicle.◀
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for the
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
▷ Every time a tire or wheel is changed, the
correct details on the mounted tires must
be entered in the tire settings, refer to
page 282.
▷ For tires with special approval:
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a re‐
set was performed with the correct tire
inflation pressure.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐
justed to a new value, a reset was per‐
formed.
▷ Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.
Tire settings
General information
The tire sizes of the mounted tires can be
gathered from the tire inflation pressure details
on the vehicle, refer to page 268, or directly on
the tires.
The tire details do not need to be re-entered
when the tire inflation pressure is corrected.
For summer and winter tires, the tire details
entered last are stored. After a tire or wheel re‐
placement, the settings of the tire sets used
last can be selected.
Opening the menu
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
Changing settings
Via iDrive:
1.
"Tire settings"
2. Selecting tires:
▷ "Summer tires"
▷ "Winter tires/all-season tires"
3. "Current:"
4. Select the tire type that is mounted on the
rear axle:
▷ Tire size, e.g., 245/45 R18 96 Y.
▷ For tires with special approval: "Other
tire"
5. Select the maximum road speed that will
be used with the tires.
6. "Confirm settings"
The measurement of the current tire inflation
pressure is started. The measurement prog‐
ress is displayed.
Status display
Current status
The system status can be displayed on the
Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys‐
tem is active.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The current status is displayed.
Seite 282
Mobility Wheels and tires
282
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Current tire inflation pressure
The current tire inflation pressure is displayed
for each tire.
The current tire inflation pressures may
change during driving operation or depending
on the external temperature.
Current tire temperature
The current tire temperatures are displayed,
depending on the model.
The current tire temperatures may change
during driving operation or depending on the
external temperature.
Target pressure
The target pressure for the tires on the front
and rear axles is displayed.
The target pressures are values stored in the
vehicle.
The specified target pressures take the influ‐
ence of driving operation and external temper‐
ature on the tire temperature into account. The
appropriate target pressure is always dis‐
played, independent of the weather situation,
tire temperatures and driving times.
The displayed target pressure may change and
may differ from the tire inflation pressure de‐
tails on the door pillar of the driver's door. The
tire inflation pressure can thus be corrected to
the value of the displayed target pressures.
The target pressure is immediately adjusted if
the vehicle load is changed in the tire settings.
Tire conditions
General information
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the wheels and a SMS text message
on the Control Display.
Any existing messages are not deleted if the
displayed target pressure is not reached after
the tire inflation pressure is corrected.
All wheels green
▷ The system is active and bases warnings
on the displayed target pressures.
▷ For tires with special approval: the system
is active and bases warnings on the tire in‐
flation pressures stored during the last re‐
set.
One to four yellow wheels
A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation
pressure has occurred in the indicated tires.
Gray wheels
It may not be possible to identify tire inflation
pressure losses.
Possible causes:
▷ Malfunction.
▷ During tire inflation pressure measure‐
ment, after confirmation of the tire set‐
tings.
▷ For tires with special approval: the system
is being reset.
For tires with special approval:
performing a reset
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not
drive off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform
reset".
6. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the fol‐
lowing is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure
Monitor…".
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as the target tire inflation pressures.
Seite 283
Wheels and tires Mobility
283
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
The reset is completed automatically while
driving.
After a successfully completed reset, the
wheels on the Control Display are shown in
green and the following is displayed: "Tire
Pressure Monitor active. See label for
recommended pressures.".
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
you continue the reset resumes automatically.
Messages: for tires without special
approval
General information
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the
DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched
on.
Safety information
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐
low the information on run-flat tires and contin‐
ued driving with these tires.◀
If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
Message
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
Inflation was not carried out accord‐
ing to specifications, e.g., the tire
has not been sufficiently inflated.
The tire settings were not updated.
Measure
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
2. Update the tire settings.
If the tire inflation pressure is too low
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control
message appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a tire inflation pressure
loss.
Measure
1.
Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a
speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a
gas station, check the tire inflation pres‐
sure in all four tires and correct if neces‐
sary.
If there is a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐
pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
trol Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
Seite 284
Mobility Wheels and tires
284
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 276, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Messages: for tires with special
approval
General information
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the
DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched
on.
Safety information
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐
low the information on run-flat tires and contin‐
ued driving with these tires.◀
If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
Message
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
Inflation was not carried out accord‐
ing to specifications, e.g., the tire
has not been sufficiently inflated.
The system has detected a wheel
change, but no reset was done.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen
below the level of the last reset.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1.
Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
2. Perform a system reset.
If the tire inflation pressure is too low
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control
message appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a tire inflation pressure
loss.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1.
Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a
speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a
gas station, check the tire inflation pres‐
sure in all four tires and correct if neces‐
sary.
Seite 285
Wheels and tires Mobility
285
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
3. Reset the system.
If there is a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐
pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
trol Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 276, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires, for instance using the tire pressure
gage of a flat tire kit.
For tires with special approval: if the tire in‐
flation pressure in all four tires is correct,
the TPM may not have been reset. In this
case, perform the reset.
If tire damage cannot be found, contact a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or
by changing the wheel.
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit,
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. Have
the electronics replaced at the next opportu‐
nity.
Run-flat tires
Safety information
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a
run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
duced, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is a
risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
WARNING
Heavy trailers can start swinging when
continuing to drive with a flat tire. There is a
risk of accidents or risk of damage to property.
Do not exceed a speed of 35 mph/60 km/h
when driving with a trailer and a flat tire. Imme‐
diately brake in the case of swinging. Apply
necessary steering corrections as carefully as
possible.◀
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Follow the following when continuing to drive
with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Seite 286
Mobility Wheels and tires
286
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires at the next opportunity.
For tires with special approval: if the tire in‐
flation pressure in all four tires is correct,
the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have
been reset. In this case, perform the reset.
Possible driving range with a
depressurized tire
The possible driving range varies depending
on the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g.,
speed, road conditions, external temperature.
The driving range may be less but may also be
more if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, its possi‐
ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
differently, potentially leading to conditions
such as the following:
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
▷ Longer braking distances.
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steer‐
ing maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for in‐
stance curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
System limits
Temperature
The tire inflation pressure depends on the
tire's temperature.
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the
tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire in‐
flation pressure.
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the
tire temperature falls again.
These circumstances may cause a warning
when temperatures fall very sharply.
Following a temperature-related warning, the
target pressures are displayed on the Control
Display again after a short distance.
Sudden tire pressure loss
The system cannot indicate sudden serious
tire damage caused by external circumstances.
Failure to perform a reset
Tires with special approval: the system will not
function correctly if a reset was not performed,
for example a flat tire may be indicated al‐
though the tire inflation pressures are correct.
Malfunction
Message
The yellow warning light flashes and is
then illuminated continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. It may
not be possible to identify tire pressure losses.
Measure
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
mounted: have the wheels checked, if
needed.
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics,
such as an emergency wheel, is mounted:
have the wheels checked, if needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked.
Seite 287
Wheels and tires Mobility
287
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
▷ For tires with special approval: the system
was unable to complete the reset. Perform
a system reset again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
tor is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐
sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
function exists. When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
Concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
tween the individual wheels while driving.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐
ence will be detected and reported as a flat
tire.
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for the
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initial‐
ization was performed with the correct tire
inflation pressure.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐
justed to a new value, an initialization was
performed.
Seite 288
Mobility Wheels and tires
288
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Status display
The current status of the flat tire monitor can
be displayed, for instance whether the RPA is
active.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization required
An initialization must be performed in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been
adjusted.
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
Performing initialization
When initializing, the set tire inflation pres‐
sures serve as reference values in order to de‐
tect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
firming the tire inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not
drive off.
5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset"
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Messages
General information
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on, if needed.
Safety information
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐
low the information on run-flat tires and contin‐
ued driving with these tires.◀
Indication of a flat tire
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control
message appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
Measure
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 276, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Seite 289
Wheels and tires Mobility
289
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
To do this, check the tire inflation pressure
in all four tires, for instance using the tire
pressure gage of a flat tire kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or
by changing the wheel.
Run-flat tires
Safety information
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a
run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
duced, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is a
risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
WARNING
Heavy trailers can start swinging when
continuing to drive with a flat tire. There is a
risk of accidents or risk of damage to property.
Do not exceed a speed of 35 mph/60 km/h
when driving with a trailer and a flat tire. Imme‐
diately brake in the case of swinging. Apply
necessary steering corrections as carefully as
possible.◀
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Follow the following when continuing to drive
with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Possible driving range with a
depressurized tire
The possible driving range varies depending
on the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g.,
speed, road conditions, external temperature.
The driving range may be less but may also be
more if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, its possi‐
ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
differently, potentially leading to conditions
such as the following:
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
▷ Longer braking distances.
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steer‐
ing maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for in‐
stance curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Seite 290
Mobility Wheels and tires
290
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
System limits
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss
in all four tires will not be recognized.
Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure
regularly.
▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by ex‐
ternal circumstances cannot be recognized
in advance.
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Changing wheels/tires
General information
When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a
wheel does not always need to be changed im‐
mediately when there is a loss of tire inflation
pressure due to a flat tire.
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
available as accessories from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
DANGER
The vehicle jack is only provided for
short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel
changes. Even if all safety measures are ob‐
served, there is a risk of the raised vehicle fall‐
ing, if the vehicle jack tilts over. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is
raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not
start the engine.◀
DANGER
Supports such as wooden blocks under
the vehicle jack may prevent it from achieving
its load capacity due to its restricted height.
The load capacity of the wooden blocks may
be exceeded, causing the vehicle to tip over.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do
not place supports under the vehicle jack.◀
WARNING
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac‐
turer, is provided in order to perform a wheel
change in the event of a breakdown. The jack
is not designed for frequent use; for example,
changing from summer to winter tires. Using
the jack frequently may cause it to become
jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. Only use the
jack to attach an emergency or spare wheel in
the event of a breakdown.◀
WARNING
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for
example snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack
can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If possi‐
ble, change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-
resistant surface.◀
WARNING
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
the vehicle and for the jacking points on the
vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift
any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle
jack.◀
WARNING
If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the
jacking point provided for this purpose, the ve‐
hicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may
slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. When
cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is
Seite 291
Wheels and tires Mobility
291
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
inserted in the jacking point next to the wheel
housing.◀
WARNING
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack
may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are ex‐
erted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property. While the vehicle is
raised, do not exert lateral forces on the vehicle
or pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck
wheel removed by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.◀
Securing the vehicle against rolling
General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to ad‐
ditionally secure the vehicle against rolling
away when changing a wheel.
On a level surface
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in
front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to
the wheel to be changed.
On a slight downhill gradient
If you need to change a wheel on a slight
downhill grade, place chocks and other suita‐
ble objects, for instance a rock, under the
wheels of both the front and rear axles against
the rolling direction.
Preparing the vehicle
▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip
ground at a safe distance from traffic.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever
to position P.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, get
wheel change tools and, if necessary, the
emergency wheel from the vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning light at an appro‐
priate distance.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against roll‐
ing.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Seite 292
Mobility Wheels and tires
292
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the indicated positions.
Jacking up the vehicle
WARNING
Hands and fingers can be jammed when
using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with the described hand position and
do not change this position while using the ve‐
hicle jack.◀
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar‐
row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank or
lever with your other hand, arrow 2.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point closest to the
wheel to be changed.
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehi‐
cle jack crank or lever clockwise.
4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack
as soon as the vehicle jack is under load
and continue turning the vehicle jack crank
or lever with one hand.
Seite 293
Wheels and tires Mobility
293
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and at a right angle beneath the
jacking point.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and perpendicularly beneath the
jacking point after extending the vehicle
jack.
7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle jack
is with the entire surface on the ground
and the relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 in‐
ches/3 cm above ground.
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.
1.
Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two lug bolts in a
crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the ve‐
hicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac‐
companying lug bolts may have to be used
as well.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐
tern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclock‐
wise to retract the vehicle jack and lower
the vehicle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se‐
curely.
After the wheel change
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐
ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo
area, if necessary.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
under the cargo floor panel because of its
size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the run-flat tires.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the
nearest dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Emergency wheel
Concept
In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel
can be used in place of the wheel with the de‐
fective tire. The emergency wheel is only in‐
tended for temporary use until the defective
tire/wheel has been replaced.
General information
Mount one emergency wheel only.
Also check the tire inflation pressure of the
emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly,
and correct it as needed.
Seite 294
Mobility Wheels and tires
294
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Safety information
WARNING
The emergency wheel has particular di‐
mensions. When driving with an emergency
wheel, changed driving properties may occur,
for instance reduced lane stability when brak‐
ing, longer braking distance, and changed self-
steering properties in the limit area. There is a
risk of an accident. Drive moderately and do
not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Overview
The emergency wheel and the wheel change
tools are located in the cargo area under the
cargo floor panel.
Removing the emergency wheel
1. Pull up and remove the cargo floor panel.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Open the ratchet strap at the clasp, ar‐
row 1.
4. Remove the emergency wheel from the
storage well, arrow 2.
Inserting the emergency wheel
1.
Place the emergency wheel in the storage
well.
2. Tie the ratchet strap. Make sure that it is
correctly and firmly seated.
3. Install the cover.
4. Insert the cargo floor panel.
Seite 295
Wheels and tires Mobility
295
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
2 Oil filler neck
3 Coolant reservoir, engine
4 Gasoline engine only: coolant reservoir,
auxiliary cooling
5 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
6 Filler neck for washer fluid
7 Vehicle identification number
Seite 296
Mobility Engine compartment
296
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Hood
Safety information
WARNING
Improperly executed work in the engine
compartment can damage vehicle compo‐
nents and impair vehicle functions. There is a
risk of personal and property damage. The
manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that, in the effort to avoid such risks, work in
the engine compartment be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.◀
WARNING
The engine compartment accommo‐
dates moving components. Certain compo‐
nents in the engine compartment can also
move with the vehicle switched off, for in‐
stance the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury.
Do not reach into the area of moving parts.
Keep articles of clothing and hair away from
moving parts.◀
WARNING
There are protruding parts, for instance
locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There
is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay atten‐
tion to protruding parts and keep clear of these
areas.◀
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open
while driving and restrict visibility. There is a
risk of an accident. Stop immediately and cor‐
rectly close the hood.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when open‐
ing and closing the hood. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the area of movement of
the hood is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
NOTE
When the hood is closed, it must engage
on both sides. Pressing again can damage the
hood. There is a risk of damage to property.
Open the hood again and then close it ener‐
getically. Avoid pressing again.◀
Opening
1.
Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
Seite 297
Engine compartment Mobility
297
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Closing
Energetically close the hood from approx.
20 in/50 cm.
The hood must engage on both sides.
Seite 298
Mobility Engine compartment
298
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
your driving style and driving conditions.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling by taking a detailed measure‐
ment.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
the following situations, for example:
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine.
▷ Idling of the engine.
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classi‐
fied as not suitable.
Different Check Control messages appear on
the Control Display depending on the engine
oil level.
Safety information
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.◀
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk
of damage to property. Do not add too much
engine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have the engine oil level corrected by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.◀
Electronic oil measurement
General information
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐
uring principles:
▷ Monitoring.
▷ Detailed measurement.
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a dynamic driving style, for instance
when taking curves aggressively, regularly per‐
form a detailed measurement.
Monitoring
Concept
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
while driving and can be shown on the Control
Display.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
A red indicator light indicates that the
engine oil pressure is too low.
Functional requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving.
Seite 299
Engine oil Mobility
299
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Displaying the engine oil level
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
System limits
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a dynamic driving style, it may not be
possible to calculate a measured value. In this
case, the measured value for the last, suffi‐
ciently long trip is displayed.
Detailed measurement
Concept
The engine oil level is checked when the vehi‐
cle is stationary and displayed via a scale.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
General information
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
Functional requirements
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in
selector lever position N or P and accelera‐
tor pedal not depressed.
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐
perature.
Performing a detailed measurement
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
4. "Measure engine oil level"
5. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed
via a scale.
Adding engine oil
General information
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
to be added is indicated in the message shown
on the Control Display.
Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to
page 301.
Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-
ready state before adding engine oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating materials, for instance oils,
greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful
ingredients. There is a risk of injuries or danger
to life. Follow the instructions on the contain‐
ers. Avoid the contact of articles of clothing,
skin or eyes with operating materials. Do not
refill operating materials into different bottles.
Store operating materials out of reach of chil‐
dren.◀
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.◀
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk
of damage to property. Do not add too much
engine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have the engine oil level corrected by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.◀
Seite 300
Mobility Engine oil
300
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
partment, refer to page 296.
Adding engine oil
1. Open the hood, refer to page 297.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise.
3. Add engine oil.
4. Close the cap.
Engine oil types to add
General information
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of
the engine.
Safety information
NOTE
Oil additives can damage the engine.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
use oil additives.◀
NOTE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐
tions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk
of damage to property. When selecting an en‐
gine oil, make sure that the engine oil has the
correct oil rating.◀
Suitable engine oil types
Add engine oils that meet the following oil rat‐
ing standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
The oil rating BMW Longlife-14 FE+ is only
suitable for particular gasoline engines.
Diesel engine
BMW Longlife-12 FE.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
API SL, API SM, or API SN.
Diesel engine
BMW Longlife-04.
API SL, API SM, or API SN.
Viscosity grades
Gasoline engine:
When selecting an engine oil, make sure that
the engine oil has the viscosity grade SAE
0W-30 or SAE 0W-20. The suitable viscosity
grade is indicated on a label in the engine com‐
partment.
Viscosity class SAE 0W-20 is only suitable for
particular engines.
Diesel engine:
Seite 301
Engine oil Mobility
301
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
When selecting an engine oil, make sure that
the engine oil has the viscosity grade SAE
0W-30.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Engine oil change
NOTE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely
fashion can cause increased engine wear and
thus engine damage. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not exceed the service data in‐
dicated in the vehicle.◀
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop change
the engine oil.
Seite 302
Mobility Engine oil
302
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Coolant
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open
the cooling system with the engine cooled
down.◀
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is a risk of
injury and risk of damage to property. Do not
allow additives to come into contact with skin,
eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi‐
tives only.◀
Coolant level
General information
Vehicles with gasoline engine feature two
cooling circuits. Always check the coolant lev‐
els of both coolant reservoirs and refill as
needed.
The coolant level is indicted using minimum
and maximum markings. Depending on the
coolant reservoir, the minimum and maximum
markings are located at different locations.
Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐
ant reservoir is located on the right side or the
left side of the engine compartment, refer to
page 296.
Checking the coolant level on the side
markings
1.
Let the engine cool.
2. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
tween the minimum and maximum marks
on the coolant reservoir.
Symbol Meaning
Maximum.
Minimum.
Checking the coolant level in the filler
neck
1.
Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
Seite 303
Coolant Mobility
303
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
3. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
4. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
tween the minimum and maximum marks
in the filler neck.
Adding
1.
Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Close the cap.
6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 304
Mobility Coolant
304
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
BMW maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases, scopes and intervals may vary
according to the country-specific version. Re‐
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
cants, and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
rately. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Concept
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of the vehicle.
CBS uses these to calculate the need for
maintenance.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
General information
Information on service requirements, refer to
page 124, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control. The
dealer’s service center can read this data out
and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi‐
cle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els for additional information on service re‐
quirements.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
Seite 305
Maintenance Mobility
305
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐
lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
tained.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Safety information
NOTE
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an
intricate component intended to be used in
conjunction with specialized equipment to
check the vehicle’s primary emissions system.
Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐
nosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a
dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or other persons
that have the specialized training and equip‐
ment for purposes of properly utilizing the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
Seite 306
Mobility Maintenance
306
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located under
the cargo floor panel.
Wiper blade replacement
Safety information
NOTE
The window may sustain damage if the
wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade in‐
stalled. There is a risk of damage to property.
Hold the wiper firmly when changing the wiper
blade. Do not fold or switch on the wiper with‐
out a wiper blade installed.◀
NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Replacing the front wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the
wiper arms, refer to page 108.
2. Lift the wiper all the way off of the wind‐
shield.
3. Press button, arrow 1, and pull out the
wiper blade, arrow 2.
4. Insert the new wiper blade and press it on
until it you hear it snap into the holder.
5. Fold down the wipers.
Seite 307
Replacing components Mobility
307
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Replacing the rear wiper blade
1. Lift off the wiper fully and pull off the wiper
blade, arrow.
2. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper blade
must engage audibly.
3. Fold down the wipers.
Lights and bulbs
General information
Lights and bulbs
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
tion to vehicle safety.
Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
source. These light-emitting diodes are related
to conventional lasers and are officially desig‐
nated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you let a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop perform
the work in case of a malfunction.
A spare light box is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 308.
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the lights switched on, the con‐
densation evaporates after a short time. The
headlight glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the headlights switched
on, increasing humidity forms, for instance wa‐
ter droplets in the light, have the headlights
checked.
Safety information
WARNING
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a
risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they
have cooled off.◀
WARNING
Work on switched-on lighting systems
can cause short circuits. There is a risk of in‐
jury or risk of damage to property. When work‐
ing on the lighting system, switch off the lights
in question. If necessary, heed the bulb manu‐
facturer's instructions.◀
WARNING
Too intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
injury. Do not look directly into the headlights
or other light sources. Do not remove the LED
covers.◀
NOTE
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a
clean cloth or something similar, or hold the
bulb by its base.◀
Front lights
LED headlights
General information
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 308.
Seite 308
Mobility Replacing components
308
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
The low-beam headlights, side lights, and day‐
time running lights and the turn signals in the
exterior mirror feature LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Overview
1 High beams/headlight flasher
2 Low beams
3 Turn signal
4 Daytime running lights/parking lights
Turn signal, bulb replacement
General information
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 308.
24-watt bulb, PY24W
Replacing a bulb
1. In the wheel house, press the two retainer
tabs and fold down the cover.
2. Unscrew and remove the bulb holder.
3. Press the bulb gently into the bulb holder,
turn counterclockwise and remove it.
4. Insert the new bulb.
5. Mount the bulb holder.
6. Mount the lid.
High beams, bulb replacement
General information
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 308.
55-watt bulb, H7.
Seite 309
Replacing components Mobility
309
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Replacing a bulb
1. Open the hood, refer to page 297.
2. Unscrew the lid counterclockwise and re‐
move it.
3. Pull the bulb holder out past the spring re‐
sistance point.
4. Pull off the bulb.
5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
the reverse order.
Make sure that the connector is correctly
seated.
LED headlights with enhanced
features
General information
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 308.
All front lights are designed with LED technol‐
ogy, with the exception of the two turn signals.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Overview
1 Cornering light
2 Daytime running lights/parking lights
3 Low-beams/high-beams
4 Turn signal
Turn signal, bulb replacement
General information
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 308.
24-watt bulb, PY24W
Seite 310
Mobility Replacing components
310
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Replacing a bulb
1. In the wheel house, press the two retainer
tabs and fold down the cover.
2. Unscrew and remove the bulb holder.
3. Press the bulb gently into the bulb holder,
turn counterclockwise and remove it.
4. Insert the new bulb.
5. Mount the bulb holder.
6. Mount the lid.
Adaptive LED headlights
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 308.
All lights feature LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
LED front fog lights
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 308.
LED front fog lights are made using LED tech‐
nology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Tail lights
General information
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 308.
With LED headlights or LED headlights with
enhanced features: the rear light features LED
technology.
With Adaptive LED headlights: all tail lights
feature LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Overview
1 Brake light
2 Turn signal
3 Tail lights
4 Backup light
5 Lower brake light
Exterior tail lights, bulb replacement
General information
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 308.
Brake lights, turn signal: 21-watt bulb, P21W.
Lower brake light: 21-watt bulb, H21W.
Seite 311
Replacing components Mobility
311
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Removing the exterior tail light
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit to loosen the clip, arrow 1, and
remove the cover, arrow 2.
3. Release both nuts.
4. Open the cover on the side trim in the
cargo area, arrow, and remove the warning
triangle, refer to page 315.
5. Loosen the screw and remove the holder.
6. Remove the connector, arrow 1, and
loosen the screw, arrow 2.
7. Detach the tail light from the body.
Replacing the bulbs
1.
Loosen the four fasteners on the bulb
holder, arrow 1, and detach the bulb holder
from the tail light, arrow 2.
2. Press the bulb gently into the bulb holder,
turn counterclockwise and remove it.
3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make
sure that the bulb holder is engaged in all
fasteners.
Seite 312
Mobility Replacing components
312
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Installing the tail light
1. Install the tail light in reverse order of re‐
moval and attach the connector.
2. Install the holder for the warning triangle
and attach the warning triangle.
3. Close the cover on the side trim in the
cargo area.
4. Fasten the cover with the clip.
Reversing light in the tailgate
General information
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 308.
21-watt bulb, H21W.
Access to the light
1.
Open the tailgate.
2. Pull out the cover at the recessed grip, ar‐
row.
Replacing a bulb
1.
Pull the bulb holder out of the reflector.
2. Press the bulb gently into the bulb holder,
turn counterclockwise and remove it.
3. To insert the new bulb and attach the bulb
holder, proceed in reverse order of re‐
moval.
Vehicle battery
General information
The battery is maintenance-free.
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
service life of the battery.
More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that you have a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after
the battery has been replaced. Once the bat‐
tery has been registered again, all comfort fea‐
tures will be available without restriction and
any Check Control messages displayed which
relate to comfort features will disappear.
Safety information
NOTE
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair vehi‐
cle functions. There is a risk of personal and
property damage. Only vehicle batteries that
are compatible with your vehicle type should
be installed in your vehicle. Information on
compatible vehicle batteries is available at your
dealer’s service center.◀
Charging the battery
General information
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
remains usable for its full service life.
A discharged battery is indicated by a
red indicator light.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives.
Seite 313
Replacing components Mobility
313
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
Safety information
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
a risk of damage to property. Only connect
battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 319, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs to
be newly initialized or individual settings up‐
dated, for example:
▷ Memory function: store the positions
again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Safety information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is a risk
of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse.
Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a sub‐
stitute of another color or amperage rating.◀
Accessing the fuses
Open the cover on the right side trim.
The fuse box is located behind the sound insu‐
lation.
Information on the fuse types and locations is
found on a separate sheet.
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop replace
the fuses.
Seite 314
Mobility Replacing components
314
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
The red light in the button flashes when the
hazard warning flashers are activated.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located behind the left-
hand cover in the cargo area.
1. Open the cover on the left side trim.
2. Open the bracket and take the warning tri‐
angle out in the direction of the car's inte‐
rior.
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any expired items
promptly.
Seite 315
Breakdown assistance Mobility
315
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Storage
The first-aid kit is located behind the left-hand
cover in the cargo area.
To open, pull on the handle.
Roadside Assistance
General information
Roadside Assistance can be reached around
the clock in many countries, and provides sup‐
port in the event of a breakdown or an acci‐
dent.
The content and scope of the services that are
available may vary by country.
For more information, see the Integrated Own‐
er's Manual, Online Owner's Manual, BMW
Driver’s Guide app or, if necessary, the Own‐
er's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication.
Roadside Assistance
Concept
BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
down.
General information
In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehi‐
cle's condition are sent directly to Roadside
Assistance.
Roadside Assistance can also be contacted via
a Check Control message, refer to page 122.
Requirements
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equip‐
ment version with Intelligent emergency
call or BMW ConnectedDrive services.
▷ Cellular network reception.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
Starting Roadside Assistance
If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices,
support is offered through Teleservice Diagno‐
sis.
Via iDrive:
1.
"ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Assist"
3. "BMW Roadside Assistance"
A voice connection is established.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that is im‐
portant for vehicle diagnosis. This data is
transmitted automatically.
A voice connection is established to Roadside
Assistance.
Starting Teleservice Help
Teleservice Help is a country-specific feature
that enables an in-depth diagnosis of the vehi‐
cle by Roadside Assistance via wireless trans‐
mission.
You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting
it through Roadside Assistance.
1.
Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Control Display is switched on.
4. "Teleservice Help"
The driving ability of the vehicle can be re‐
stored for specific functions.
If this is not possible, further measures will be
initiated, for instance Roadside Assistance will
be informed.
Seite 316
Mobility Breakdown assistance
316
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
BMW Accident Assistance
Concept
BMW Group Accident Assistance can be con‐
tacted if assistance is needed in the event of
an accident.
General information
If the vehicle sensors detect a minor to moder‐
ately severe accident, which did not trigger any
airbags, a Check Control message appears on
the instrument cluster. In addition, a text mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
When BMW Accident Assistance is activated,
data on the vehicle's condition is sent to BMW.
Requirements
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equip‐
ment version with Intelligent emergency
call or BMW ConnectedDrive services.
▷ Cellular network reception.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
Starting BMW Accident Assistance
If an accident is detected automatically
A text message relating to BMW Accident As‐
sistance appears on the Control Display.
The connection can be established directly:
"BMW Accident Assist."
The Check Control message for BMW Acci‐
dent Assistance can also be called up from the
stored Check Control messages, refer to
page 122, for a certain length of time.
Starting manually
BMW Accident Assistance can also be con‐
tacted independently of the automatic acci‐
dent detection function.
Via iDrive:
1.
"ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Assist"
3. "BMW Accident Assistance"
Follow the displays on the Control Display.
A voice connection is established.
4. "End call"
The voice connection can be terminated.
Intelligent emergency call
Concept
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
quest can be made through the system.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable con‐
ditions.
Overview
SOS button in the roofliner.
Functional requirements
▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Seite 317
Breakdown assistance Mobility
317
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, for instance if the air‐
bags trigger, an Emergency Request is auto‐
matically initiated immediately after an acci‐
dent of corresponding severity. Automatic
Collision Notification is not affected by press‐
ing the SOS button.
Initiating an Emergency Request
manually
1. Touch the cover.
2. Press the SOS button and hold until the
LED on the microphone lights up green.
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an
Emergency Request has been initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the Control
Display, the Emergency Request can be
aborted.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection
to the BMW Response Center has been
established.
The BMW Response Center then makes
contact with you and takes further steps to
help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum‐
stances.
For this, data is transmitted to the BMW
Response Center which serves to deter‐
mine the necessary rescue measures. E.g.,
the current position of the vehicle, if it can
be established.
Even if you can no longer hear the BMW
Response Center through the loudspeak‐
ers, the BMW Response Center may still
be able to hear you.
The BMW Response Center ends the Emer‐
gency Request.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Do not touch any components
that are under voltage.◀
WARNING
If the jumper cables are connected in the
incorrect order, sparking may occur. There is a
risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order
during connection.◀
NOTE
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is a risk of damage to
property. Make sure that no body contact oc‐
curs.◀
Preparation
1.
Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage
information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Seite 318
Mobility Breakdown assistance
318
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Starting aid terminals
The starting aid terminal in the engine com‐
partment acts as the battery's positive termi‐
nal.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
A special connection on the body acts as the
battery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
Before you begin, switch off all unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers, such as
the radio, on the assisting and receiving vehi‐
cle.
1.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
If the vehicle to be started has a diesel en‐
gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle
run for approx. 10 minutes.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
Tow-starting and towing
Safety information
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.◀
Seite 319
Breakdown assistance Mobility
319
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Steptronic transmission: transporting
the vehicle
General information
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Safety information
NOTE
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is
a risk of damage to property. The vehicle
should only be transported on a loading plat‐
form.◀
NOTE
The vehicle can become damaged when
lifting and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property.
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.◀
Pushing the vehicle
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the
danger area, it can be pushed for a short dis‐
tance.
Roll or push, refer to page 112, the vehicle.
Tow truck
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
Towing other vehicles
General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
ing on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden‐
tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign
or a warning triangle in the rear window.
Safety information
WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse. There is a risk of an accident! Make
sure that the gross vehicle weight of the tow‐
ing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be
towed.◀
NOTE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can
occur. There is a risk of damage to property.
Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the
tow fitting.◀
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please follow the
following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable
the vehicle to be towed without jerking.
Seite 320
Mobility Breakdown assistance
320
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting is found in the onboard vehicle
tool kit, refer to page 307.
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for
instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow
fitting.
Safety information
NOTE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
there may be damage to the vehicle or to the
tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Follow the notes on using the tow fit‐
ting.◀
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
push it out.
For covers which have an opening instead of a
marking, pull the cover out by the opening.
Tow-starting
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
page 318, if possible.
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties
corrected by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 321
Breakdown assistance Mobility
321
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Care
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Washing the vehicle
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as
leaves in the area below the windshield when
the hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐
age the vehicle.
Steam blaster and high-pressure
washer
Safety information
NOTE
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐
ers, components can be damaged due to the
pressure or temperatures being too high.
There is a risk of damage to property. Maintain
sufficient distance and do not spray too long
continuously. Follow the operating instructions
for the high-pressure washer.◀
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 in/30 cm.
▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 in/80 cm.
Automatic vehicle washes
Safety information
NOTE
Improper use of automatic vehicle
washes can cause damage to the vehicle.
There is a risk of damage to property. Follow
the following instructions:
▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
the chassis.
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
the exterior mirrors.
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain
sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐
tem.◀
Driving into a vehicle wash with a
Steptronic transmission
Safety information
NOTE
Selector lever position P is automatically
engaged when standby state is switched off.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
switch standby state off in vehicle washes.◀
General information
In a vehicle wash, the vehicle must be able to
roll freely.
Roll or push the vehicle, refer to page 112.
Seite 322
Mobility Care
322
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from
the outside when in selector lever position N. A
signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock
the vehicle.
Driving out of a vehicle wash
Make sure that the remote control is in the ve‐
hicle.
Switch on drive-ready state, refer to page 99.
Headlights
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance
from insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced. The heat generated during
braking dries brake discs and brake pads and
protects them against corrosion.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Vehicle care products
General information
BMW recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from BMW. Suitable care
products are available from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
Cleansers can contain substances that
are dangerous and harmful to your health.
There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the in‐
terior, open the doors or windows. Only use
products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol‐
low the instructions on the container.◀
Vehicle paint
General information
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your vehicle care to
these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
tered or discolored.
Matte finish
Only use cleaning and care products suitable
for vehicles with matte finish.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using
a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Seite 323
Care Mobility
323
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Upholstery material care
General information
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vac‐
uum cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bev‐
erage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber
cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the
material vigorously.
Safety information
NOTE
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is
a risk of damage to property. Ensure that any
Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disc.
After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
them. The heat generated during braking dries
brake discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface
soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use
only water and suitable cleaning agents for
cleaning.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
or noises.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Kenaf
Only treat parts made of Kenaf fibers using
suitable care products.
Plastic components
NOTE
Cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage
plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen
cloth lightly with water.◀
Plastic components are e.g.:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Roofliner.
▷ Light lenses.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the car's interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Do not soak the roofliner.
Seite 324
Mobility Care
324
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Safety belts
WARNING
Chemical cleansers can destroy the
safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect
of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution
for cleaning the safety belts.◀
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the
installed belt straps.
Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if
they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.◀
The floor mats can be removed from the car's
interior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Mount for trailer hitch
Keep the mount clean.
Regularly grease or oil bearings and sliding
surfaces with resin-free greases or oils.
Before using steam cleaners or high pressure
cleaners on the vehicle, remove the ball head
and insert the cover into the mount.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.
Displays, screens, and protective
glass of the Head-up Display
NOTE
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
any kind can damage the surface of displays
and screens. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber
cloth.◀
NOTE
The surface of displays can be damaged
with improper cleaning. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Avoid pressure that is too high
and do not use any scratching materials.◀
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐
play, refer to page 131, using a microfiber cloth
and commercially available dish-washing soap.
Long-term vehicle storage
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be
taken. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 325
Care Mobility
325
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Technical data
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
The technical data and specifications in this
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,
for instance due to the selected special equip‐
ment, country version or country-specific
measurement method. Detailed values can be
found in the approval documents, on labels on
the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
The information in the vehicle documents al‐
ways has priority over the information in this
Owner's Manual.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-specific
measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for instance a roof antenna,
roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,
for instance due to the selected special equip‐
ment, tires, load and chassis version.
BMW X3
Width with mirrors inches/mm 84.2/2,138
Width without mirrors inches/mm 74.4-74.7/1,891-1,897
Height inches/mm 66/1,676
Length inches/mm 185.9-186.1/4,722-4,726
Wheelbase inches/mm 112.8/2,864
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 39.4-39.7/12.0-12.1
Seite 328
Reference Technical data
328
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Weights
X3 xDrive30i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,258/2,385
Load lbs/kg 937/425
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,513/1,140
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,020/1,370
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
X3 M40i powered by BMW M
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,412/2,455
Load lbs/kg 959/435
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,623/1,190
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,075/1,395
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
Trailer towing
X3 xDrive30i
Details about possible increases can be requested from a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Without brakes
lbs/kg
1,653/750
With brakes on uphill grades of up to 12 %
lbs/kg
4,409/2,000
Maximum drawbar nose weight
lbs/kg
441/200
Approved rear axle load
lbs/kg
2,961/1,343
Approved gross vehicle weight
lbs/kg
4,982/2,260
Seite 329
Technical data Reference
329
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
X3 M40i powered by BMW M
Details about possible increases can be requested from a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Without brakes
lbs/kg
1,653/750
With brakes on uphill grades of up to 12 %
lbs/kg
4,409/2,000
Maximum drawbar nose weight
lbs/kg
441/200
Approved rear axle load
lbs/kg
2,917/1,323
Approved gross vehicle weight
lbs/kg
4,989/2,263
Capacities
BMW X3 US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. 17.1/65.0 Fuel quality, refer to
page 262.
Seite 330
Reference Technical data
330
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐
hicle are listed here.
Updates made after the
editorial deadline
These chapters of the printed Owner's Manual
contain updates made after the editorial dead‐
line.
▷ Information: vehicle identification number,
refer to page 12.
Seite 331
Appendix Reference
331
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 168
Acceleration Assistant, see
Launch Control 114
Accessories and parts 8
Accident Assistance 317
Accident prevention, see Ac‐
tive Protection 165
ACC, see Active Cruise Con‐
trol with Stop&Go func‐
tion 175
Activated-charcoal fil‐
ter 211, 215
Activating trailer towing 249
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 157
Active Cruise Control with
Stop&Go function,
ACC 175
Active damping control, see
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol 208
Active Guard, see Intelligent
Safety 143
Active Protection 165
Active seat ventilation 92
Adaptive brake assistant 168
Adaptive brake lights, see
Brake force display 164
Adaptive Light Control 136
Adaptive M chassis 208
ADAPTIVE, see Driving Dy‐
namics Control 115
Additives, engine oil
types 301
Airbags 140
Airbags, indicator and warn‐
ing light 142
Air circulation, see Recircu‐
lated-air mode 210, 214
Air conditioning 210, 213
Air, dehumidifying, see Air
conditioning 210, 213
Air distribution,
manual 211, 214
Air flow, automatic climate
control 211, 214
Air outlets, see Ventila‐
tion 215
Air pressure, tires 268
Alarm system 76
Alarm, unintentional 77
Alertness assistant 166
All-season tires, see Winter
tires 275
All-wheel-drive, see
xDrive 170
Ambient air package 219
Ambient light 139
Antifreeze, see Washer
fluid 109
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 168
Anti-slip control, see
DSC 168
Anti-theft protection, lock‐
ing 59
Apple CarPlay, connection to
the vehicle 47
Approach control warning
with City light braking func‐
tion 145
Approach control warning
with light braking func‐
tion 145
Approved axle load 329
Approved total weight 329
Apps, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 6
Arrival time 129
Ashtray 226
Ashtray, front 226
Assistance when driving off,
see Drive-off assistant 168
Assistance with break‐
down 315
AUC Automatic Recirculating
Air Control 213
Audio, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication 6
AUTO H button, see Parking
brake 103
Automatic activation, see In‐
dividual activation 92
Automatic climate con‐
trol 209, 212
Automatic cruise control with
Stop&Go function 175
Automatic Curb Monitor, ex‐
terior mirror 89
Automatic deactivation, front-
seat passenger airbags 142
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 135
Automatic Hold, see Parking
brake 103
Automatic locking 75
Automatic Recirculating Air
Control AUC 213
Automatic Soft Closing 72
Automatic transmission, see
Steptronic transmis‐
sion 110
Automatic unlocking 75
Automatic vehicle wash 322
Seite 332
Reference Everything from A to Z
332
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 210, 213
AUTO program, intensity 213
Auto Start/Stop function 100
AUX-IN port, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Average speed and average
fuel consumption 129
Axle loads, weights 329
B
Backrest curvature, see Lum‐
bar support 83
Backrest, seats 82
Backrest tilt 83
Backrest, width 84
Bad road trips 242
Bandages, see First-aid
kit 315
Bar for tow-starting/
towing 320
Battery, changing, remote
control of the vehicle 61
Battery, disposing of 314
Battery, vehicle 313
Being towed, see Tow-start‐
ing and towing 319
Belts, see Safety belts 84
Beverage holder, see Cup
holders 231
Biodiesel 263
Blocking, power window, see
Safety switch 79
Bluetooth connection 44
Blu-ray, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
BMW Advanced Diesel 263
BMW Assist, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
BMW display key 62
BMW display key, malfunc‐
tion 65
BMW Driver’s Guide App 53
BMW Gesture Control 33
BMW maintenance sys‐
tem 305
Bonus range, ECO PRO 254
Bottle holder, see Cup hold‐
ers 231
Brake assistant 168
Brake assistant, adaptive 168
Brake Controller 250
Brake discs, breaking in, see
Brake system 242
Brake force display 164
Brake lights, brake force dis‐
play 164
Brake lights, see Lights and
bulbs 308
Brake pads, breaking in, see
Brake system 242
Brake system 242
Braking, information 244
Breakdown assis‐
tance 315, 316
Breakdown assistance, Road‐
side Assistance 316
Breakdown, see FTM Flat
Tire Monitor 288
Break-in 242
Brightness, Control Dis‐
play 41
Bulb replacement, see Lights
and bulbs 308
Bulbs, replacing, see Lights
and bulbs 308
Buttons on the steering
wheel 16
Button, SOS, see Intelligent
emergency call 317
Button, Start/Stop 99
Bypassing, see Jump-start‐
ing 318
C
Cable for tow-starting/
towing 320
Calendar, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
California Proposition 65
Warning 8
Calling up mirror adjust‐
ment 75
Calling up seat adjust‐
ment 75
Camera-based assistance
systems, see Intelligent
Safety 143
Camera-based cruise control,
see Active Cruise Control
with Stop&Go function 175
Camera lenses, care 325
Camera, rearview camera,
without Surround View 190
Camera, see Surround
View 193
Can holder, see Cup hold‐
ers 231
Care, Head-up Display 325
Care of displays, screens 325
Care, see Washing the vehi‐
cle 322
Care, vehicle 323
Cargo area 233
Cargo area, enlarging 236
Cargo area, loading, see
Stowing and securing
cargo 234
Cargo area partition net 238
Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 235
Cargo cover 238
Cargo, stowing and secur‐
ing 234
Cargo straps, see Lashing
eyes in the cargo area 234
Carpet, care 325
Seite 333
Everything from A to Z Reference
333
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
CarPlay, connection to the
vehicle 47
Car seats, see Transporting
children safely 94
Cartridge replacement, see
Ambient air package 219
Car wash 322
Car washing 322
Catalytic converter, see Hot
exhaust gas system 243
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 305
CD, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 6
Cell phone, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Center armrest 231
Center console 18
Central Information Display
(CID), see Control Dis‐
play 23
Central locking system 67
Central screen, see Control
Display 23
Changes, technical, see For
Your Own Safety 8
Changing parts 307
Changing wheels 291
Changing wheels/tires 274
Chassis number, see Vehicle
identification number 12
Check Control 119
Checking the engine oil level
electronically 299
Checking the oil level elec‐
tronically 299
Children, seating position 94
Children, transporting
safely 94
Child restraint system
LATCH 96
Child restraint systems,
mounting 95
Child restraint systems, see
Transporting children
safely 94
Child safety locks 97
Child seat, mounting 95
Child seats, see Transporting
children safely 94
Chrome-plated surfaces,
care 324
Chrome surfaces, care 324
Cigarette lighter 226
Cigarette lighter, front 226
Cleaning displays,
screens 325
Cleaning, Head-up Dis‐
play 325
Climate control 209, 212
Clothes hooks 232
Coasting 255
Coasting with engine decou‐
pled, see Coasting 255
Coasting with idling en‐
gine 255
Cold starting, see Starting the
engine 99
Combination switch, see Turn
signals 106
Combination switch, see
Washer/wiper system 106
Comfort Access 67
COMFORT, see Driving Dy‐
namics Control 115
Communication, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Compact wheel, see Emer‐
gency wheel 294
Comparison of entries, see
Entry comparison 27
Compartments in the
doors 230
Compatible devices, see Suit‐
able devices 44
Compressor 277
Computer, see Onboard
Computer in the instrument
cluster 128
Concierge Service, see Own‐
er's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Condensation, removing from
the windows 211, 215
Condensation water under
the parked vehicle 245
Condition Based Service
CBS 305
Confirmation signal from the
vehicle 75
ConnectedDrive, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Connecting device 43
Connecting electrical devices,
see Sockets 227
Connecting, mobile devi‐
ces 43
Connecting mobile phone 43
Connecting smartphone 43
Connecting telephone 43
Connections, Screen Mirror‐
ing 48
Contacts, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
Container for washer
fluid 109
Continued driving with a flat
tire 286, 290
Control Display 23
Control Display, settings 39
Controller 24, 25
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 168
Convenient closing with the
remote control 60
Convenient opening with the
remote control 59
Coolant 303
Seite 334
Reference Everything from A to Z
334
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Coolant level 303
Coolant temperature 123
Cooling, maximum 213
Cooling system 303
Cornering light 136
Corrosion on brake discs 245
Cosmetic mirror 225
Crossing traffic warning 205
Cruise control 173
Cruise control, active with
Stop&Go function 175
Cruise control with distance
control, see Active Cruise
Control with Stop&Go func‐
tion 175
Cruise control without dis‐
tance control, see Cruise
control 173
Cruising range 124
Cup holder 231
Cup holder, front 231
Cup holder, rear 231
Current fuel consumption,
Onboard Computer 129
D
Damage, tires 274
Damping control, dy‐
namic 208
Data memory 9
Data protection, settings 42
Data, see Deleting personal
data in the vehicle 42
Data, technical 328
Date 40
Daytime running lights 135
DCC, see Cruise control 173
Defogging the win‐
dows 211, 215
Defrosting the win‐
dows 211, 215
Dehumidifying, air 210, 213
Deleting personal data 42
Departure time, parked-car
ventilation 219
Destination distance 129
Device list, displaying 49
Devices, managing 49
Diagnosis connection 306
Diesel exhaust fluid at low
temperatures 264
Diesel exhaust fluid, having
refilled 264
Diesel exhaust fluid on mini‐
mum 264
Diesel exhaust fluid, see
BMW Advanced Diesel 263
Diesel fuel 263
Diesel particulate filter, see
Exhaust gas particulate fil‐
ter 243
Digital clock 123
Dimensions 328
Dimmable exterior mirrors 89
Dimmable interior mirror 89
Direct dial buttons, see Pro‐
grammable memory but‐
tons 31
Direction indicator, see Turn
signals 106
Display in the windshield, see
Head-up Display 131
Display key, malfunction 65
Display key, see BMW display
key 62
Display lighting, see Instru‐
ment lighting 138
Displays 118
Displays and symbols 7
Displays, ECO PRO 254
Displays, screens 325
Disposal, coolant 304
Disposal, vehicle battery 314
Distance control, see
PDC 186
Distance to destination 129
Divided screen view, see Split
screen 30
Door lock, see Remote con‐
trol 58
Downhill control, see HDC Hill
Descent Control 171
Drawbar nose weight 329
Drive-off assistant 168
Drive-off assistant, see
DSC 168
Driver assistance, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 143
Drive-ready state, idle state,
and standby state 21
Drive-ready state, see Start‐
ing the engine 99
Driver profiles 72
Driver profiles, welcome
screen 72
Driving Assistant, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 143
Driving comfort 208
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 115
Driving instructions, break-
in 242
Driving mode, ECO PRO 252
Driving mode, see Driving Dy‐
namics Control 115
Driving notes, general 243
Driving on bad roads 242
Driving on racetracks 246
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 168
Driving style analysis, ECO
PRO 256
Driving tips 243
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 168
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 169
DVD, Video, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol 208
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 168
Seite 335
Everything from A to Z Reference
335
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 169
E
ECO PRO 252
ECO PRO bonus range 254
ECO PRO displays 254
ECO PRO driving style analy‐
sis 256
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL, see
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 115
ECO PRO, see Driving Dy‐
namics Control 115
Electric sunroof, glass 79
Electronic oil measure‐
ment 299
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, see DSC 168
E-mail, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
Emergency Request 317
Emergency service, see Acci‐
dent Assistance 317
Emergency service, see
Breakdown assistance 316
Emergency service, see
Roadside Assistance 316
Emergency unlocking, fuel
filler flap 261
Emergency unlocking, trans‐
mission lock 114
Emergency wheel 294
Energy recovery, Onboard
Computer 129
Energy savings, see Gear
shift indicator 125
Engine, automatic Start/Stop
function 100
Engine compartment 296
Engine compartment, work‐
ing in 297
Engine coolant 303
Engine idling when driving,
see Coasting 255
Engine oil 299
Engine oil, adding 300
Engine oil change 302
Engine oil filler neck 300
Engine oil temperature 123
Engine oil types, suitable 301
Engine oil types to add 301
Engine start, jump-start‐
ing 318
Engine start, see Drive-ready
state 99
Engine stopping, see Drive-
ready state 99
Engine temperature 123
Entering a destination, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Entering an address, naviga‐
tion, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication 6
Entertainment, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Entry comparison, naviga‐
tion 27
Equipment, interior 223
Error displays, see Check
Control 119
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, see DSC 168
Evasion assistance 149
Exchanging wheels/tires 274
Exhaust gas particulate fil‐
ter 243
Exhaust gas system 243
Exhaustion warner 166
Exhaust, see Exhaust gas
system 243
Exterior lighting during un‐
locking 59
Exterior lighting with the vehi‐
cle locked 60
Exterior mirror, Automatic
Curb Monitor 89
Exterior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 89
Exterior mirrors 88
Exterior mirrors, malfunc‐
tion 89
External start 318
External temperature 123
Eyelet for towing 321
Eyes, see Lashing eyes in the
cargo area 234
F
Failure message, see Check
Control 119
False alarm, see Avoiding un‐
intentional alarms 77
Fan run-on, see Exhaust gas
particulate filter 243
Fan, see Air flow 211, 214
Fastening safety belts, see
Safety belts 84
Filler neck for engine oil 300
Finding charging stations, see
Charging stations and points
of interest, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Fine wood parts, care 324
First-aid kit 315
Fittings for trailer safety
chain, trailer towing 250
Flat tire, changing
wheels 291
Flat tire, continued driv‐
ing 286, 290
Flat tire message, FTM 289
Flat tire message, TPM 284
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 288
Flat tire, repairing 276
Seite 336
Reference Everything from A to Z
336
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Flat tire, see Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 281
Flat tire warning light,
FTM 289
Flat tire warning light,
TPM 284
Flooding 244
Floor carpet, care 325
Floor mats, care 325
Fog, removing from the win‐
dows 211, 215
Fold-away position of the
wipers 108
Fold back rear seat back‐
rests 236
Foot brake 244
For Your Own Safety 8
Fragrance cartridge, see Am‐
bient air package 219
Fragrance, see Ambient air
package 219
Fragrancing, see Ambient air
package 219
Front airbags 140
Front center armrest 231
Front fog lights 138
Front fog lights, see Lights
and bulbs 308
Front lights, see Lights and
bulbs 308
Front-seat passenger airbags,
automatic deactivation 142
Front-seat passenger airbags,
indicator light 143
Front seats 82
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 288
Fuel 262
Fuel cap 260
Fuel consumption display,
ECO PRO 254
Fuel consumption display,
Onboard Computer 129
Fuel filler flap 260
Fuel filler flap, unlocking man‐
ually 261
Fuel gauge 122
Fuel quality 262
Fuel recommendation 262
Fuel, tank capacity 330
Fuses 314
G
Garage door opener, see
Integrated Universal Remote
Control 223
Gasoline 262
Gasoline particulate filter, see
Exhaust gas particulate fil‐
ter 243
Gear change, Steptronic
transmission 110
Gear shift indicator 125
General driving notes 243
General settings 39
Gesture Control 33
Gestures, see BMW Gesture
Control 33
Glare shield, see Sun vi‐
sor 225
Glass sunroof, electric 79
Glass sunroof, initialize the
system 81
Glove compartment 229
GPS geolocation, vehicle po‐
sition 40
GPS, navigation, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Gross weight, permissible for
trailer towing 329
H
Handbrake, see Parking
brake 103
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 224
Hands-free kit, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Hazard warning flashers 315
HDC Hill Descent Con‐
trol 171
Head airbags 140
Headlight control, auto‐
matic 135
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture 135
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture, switching on 61
Headlight flasher 106
Headlight glass 308
Headlights, care 323
Headlights, see Lights and
bulbs 308
Head restraints, front 86
Head restraints, rear 87
Head-up Display 131
Head-up Display, care 325
Head-up Display, see Mem‐
ory function 90
Head-up Display, standard
view 132
Heated steering wheel 90
Heated steering wheel, indi‐
vidual activation 92
Heavy cargo, stowing
cargo 234
Height, vehicle 328
High-beam Assistant 136
High beams 106
High beams/low beams, see
High-beam Assistant 136
Hill Descent Control
HDC 171
Hills 245
Hill start assistant, see Drive-
off assistant 168
Holder for beverages, see
Cup holders 231
Homepage 6
Hood 297
Horn 16
Hot exhaust gas system 243
Seite 337
Everything from A to Z Reference
337
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Hotline, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
Humidity in the headlight, see
Headlight glass 308
Hydroplaning 244
I
iBrake – PostCrash 165
Ice warning, see External
temperature 123
Icy roads, see External tem‐
perature 123
Identification marks, tires 272
Identification number, see Ve‐
hicle identification num‐
ber 12
Idle state, standby state, and
drive-ready state 21
iDrive 23
Ignition key, see Remote con‐
trol 58
Indicator and warning lights,
see Check Control 119
Individual activation 92
Individual air distribu‐
tion 211, 214
Individual settings, see Driver
profiles 72
Inductive charging, see Wire‐
less charging, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Inflation pressure monitor,
see Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 281
Inflation pressure, tires 268
Inflation pressure warning
FTM, tires 288
Information 6
Initialization, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 289
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 283
Instrument cluster 118
Instrument lighting 138
Integrated key 66
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle 52
Integrated Universal Remote
Control 223
Intelligent Auto Start/Stop
function 102
Intelligent emergency
call 317
Intelligent Safety 143
Intended use 8
Intensity, AUTO pro‐
gram 213
Interior equipment 223
Interior lights 138
Interior lights during unlock‐
ing 59
Interior lights with the vehicle
locked 60
Interior mirror 88
Interior mirror, automatic dim‐
ming feature 89
Interior motion sensor 77
Internet connection 47
Internet hotspot 47
Internet page 6
Intersection warning, see Ap‐
proach control warning with
light braking function 145
Interval display, see Service
requirements 124
Ionization, see Ambient air
package 219
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 293
Jam protection system, glass
sunroof 80
Jam protection system, win‐
dows 78
Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐
sion 110
Jump-starting 318
Jump-starting terminals 319
K
Kenaf, care 324
Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐
cess 67
Key, mechanical 66
Key, see BMW display key 62
Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐
mission 110
Knee airbag 141
L
Label on recommended
tires 275
Lane control assistant, see
Steering and lane control as‐
sistant 182
Lane control assistant with
active side collision protec‐
tion, see Side collision warn‐
ing 161
Lane departure warning 154
Lane threshold, warning 154
Language, setting on the
Control Display 39
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area 234
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 96
Launch Control 114
Leather care 323
LEDs, replacing, see Lights
and bulbs 308
Length, vehicle 328
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 27
License plate light, see Lights
and bulbs 308
Light-alloy wheels, care 324
Light control, adaptive 136
Seite 338
Reference Everything from A to Z
338
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Light-emitting diodes, replac‐
ing, see Lights and
bulbs 308
Lighter, cigarettes 226
Lighting 134
Light in the exterior mirror,
see Active Blind Spot De‐
tection 157
Light in the exterior mirror,
see Crossing traffic warn‐
ing 205
Light replacement, see Lights
and bulbs 308
Lights 134
Lights and bulbs 308
Light switch 134
List of all messages 41
Load 234
Loading 233
Location, vehicle position 40
Locking, automatic 75
Locking, settings 74
Locking using the remote
control 59
Locks, child safety 97
Low beams 134
Low beams, automatic, see
High-beam Assistant 136
Lower back support 83
Low-Sulfur Diesel 263
Luggage rack, see Roof-
mounted luggage rack 245
Lumbar support 83
M
Maintenance 305
Maintenance requirements,
see Condition Based Serv‐
ice CBS 305
Maintenance, see Service re‐
quirements 124
Maintenance system,
BMW 305
Make-up mirror 225
Malfunction, BMW display
key 65
Malfunction displays, see
Check Control 119
Malfunction, remote con‐
trol 61
Manual air distribu‐
tion 211, 214
Manual air flow 211, 214
Manual brake, see Parking
brake 103
Manual mode, Steptronic
transmission 110
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 261
Map update, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Marking, run-flat tire 276
Master key, see Remote con‐
trol 58
Matte finish 323
Maximum cooling 213
Maximum speed display, see
Speed Limit Info 125
Maximum speed of winter
tires 275
M chassis, adaptive 208
Measurement, units of 40
Medical supplies, see First-
aid kit 315
Memory function 90
Menu, instrument cluster, see
Selection lists 127
Menus, operating, see
iDrive 23
Messages 41
Messages, see Check Con‐
trol 119
Microfilter 211, 215
Minimum tread depth,
tires 273
Mirror 88
Mirror, see Memory func‐
tion 90
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 244
Mobile devices, managing 49
Mobile phone, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Mobility System 277
Mode, ECO PRO 252
Modifications, technical, see
For Your Own Safety 8
Monitor, see Control Dis‐
play 23
Mount for trailer hitch 249
Mount for trailer hitch,
care 325
Mounting of child restraint
systems 95
MP3 player, see Audio, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Multi-function hook 235
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 16
Multimedia, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Music hard disk, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
N
Navigation, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Neck restraints, front, see
Head restraints 86
Neck restraints, rear, see
Head restraints 87
Net, cargo area 236
Seite 339
Everything from A to Z Reference
339
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Neutral cleaner, see Light-al‐
loy wheels 324
New wheels and tires 274
Nose weight, see Drawbar
nose weight 329
Notes, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
Nylon rope for tow-starting/
towing 320
O
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 306
Obstacle marking, rearview
camera 192, 196
Octane rating, see Recom‐
mended fuel grade 263
Odometer and trip odome‐
ter 128
Offroad trips 242
Oil 299
Oil, adding 300
Oil change 302
Oil change interval, see Serv‐
ice requirements 124
Oil filler neck 300
Oil types, suitable 301
Oil types to add, engine 301
Onboard Computer in the in‐
strument cluster 128
Onboard Computer on the
Control Display 130
Onboard Diagnosis OBD 306
Onboard literature,
printed 52
Onboard vehicle tool kit 307
On-call service, see Accident
Assistance 317
On-call service, see Break‐
down assistance 316
On-call service, see Roadside
Assistance 316
Online Entertainment, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Online Owner's Manual 54
Opening and closing 58
Operating concept, iDrive 23
Operating with the Control‐
ler 25
Operation via touchscreen 28
Outside air, see AUC 213
Overheating of engine, see
Coolant temperature 123
Overwintering, see Long-
term vehicle storage 325
Owner's Manual media 52
Owner's Manual, printed 52
P
Paint, vehicle 323
Pairing, mobile devices, see
Connections 43
Panic alarm, see Panic
mode 76
Panic mode 76
Panorama View, see Sur‐
round View 193
Panoramic glass sunroof 79
Park Distance Control
PDC 186
Parked-car ventilation 218
Parking aid, see PDC 186
Parking assistant 200
Parking assistant Plus, see
Surround View 193
Parking brake 103
Parking lights 134
Parking with Automatic Hold,
see Parking brake 103
Particulate filter, see Exhaust
gas particulate filter 243
Partition net 238
Parts and accessories 8
Passenger's side mirror, tilt‐
ing, see Automatic Curb
Monitor, exterior mirror 89
Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
era 192, 196
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 186
Performance Control 208
Performance display, see
Sport displays 130
Personal data, deleting 42
Personal profile, see Driver
profiles 72
Person warning with City light
braking function 151
Plastic parts, care 324
PostCrash – iBrake 165
Power failure 314
Power sunroof, glass 79
Power windows 78
Prescribed engine oil
types 301
Pressure monitor, see Tire
Pressure Monitor TPM 281
Pressure, tires 268
Pressure warning FTM,
tires 288
Printed onboard literature 52
Profiles, see Driver pro‐
files 72
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 31
Protective function, glass
sunroof, see Jam protection
system 80
Protective function, windows,
see Jam protection sys‐
tem 78
Push-and-turn reel, see Con‐
troller 24, 25
Q
Queuing Assistant, see
Steering and lane control as‐
sistant 182
Seite 340
Reference Everything from A to Z
340
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
R
Racetrack operation 246
Radiator fan, see Exhaust gas
particulate filter 243
Radiator fluid 303
Radio-operated key, see Re‐
mote control 58
Radio, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication 6
Rain sensor 107
Rapeseed-oil methyl ester
RME 263
Rear automatic climate con‐
trol 216
Rear collision prevention 163
Rear collision warning, see
Rear collision preven‐
tion 163
Rear lights, see Lights and
bulbs 308
Rear seat backrest tilt 84
Rear seats 84
Rearview camera, see Sur‐
round View 193
Rearview camera, without
Surround View 190
Rear window de‐
froster 211, 215
Recirculated-air filter, see Mi‐
crofilter/activated-charcoal
filter 211, 215
Recirculated-air
mode 210, 214
Recommended fuel
grade 263
Recommended tire
brands 275
Refueling 260
Remote 3D View 200
Remote control 58
Remote control, additional 61
Remote control for audio, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Remote control, integrated
key 66
Remote control, loss 61
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 61
Remote control of the vehicle,
changing the battery 61
Remote control, univer‐
sal 223
Remote control with display,
malfunction 65
Remote control with display,
see BMW display key 62
Remote services, App, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Replacing parts 307
Replacing wheels/tires 274
Reporting safety malfunc‐
tions 12
RES CNCL button, see Active
Cruise Control with
Stop&Go function 175
RES CNCL button, see Cruise
control 173
Reserve warning, see
Range 124
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 283
Retaining straps, cargo
area 236
Retreaded tires 275
Reversing lights, bulb re‐
placement, see Lights and
bulbs 308
RME rapeseed-oil methyl es‐
ter 263
Roadside Assistance 316
Roadside Assistancee, see
Breakdown assistance 316
Roadside Assistance, see Ac‐
cident Assistance 317
Roadside parking lights 134
Roller sunblinds, rear side
windows 79
Rolling code hand-held trans‐
mitter 224
RON recommended fuel
grade 263
Roofliner 19
Roof load capacity 329
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 245
Rope for tow-starting/
towing 320
Route, navigation, see Own‐
er's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
RSC Run-flat System Com‐
ponent, see Run-flat
tires 276
RTTI, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 6
Rubber components,
care 324
Run-flat tire 276
Run-on of fan, see Exhaust
gas particulate filter 243
S
Safe braking 244
Safety belt reminder for driv‐
er's seat and front passen‐
ger seat 85
Safety belts 84
Safety belts, care 325
Safety locks, doors and win‐
dows 97
Safety package, see Active
Protection 165
Safety switch, windows 79
Safety systems, see Air‐
bags 140
Safety systems, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 143
Saving fuel 251
Seite 341
Everything from A to Z Reference
341
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Screen Mirroring, connec‐
tion 48
Screen, see Control Dis‐
play 23
Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit 307
Sealant, see Mobility Sys‐
tem 277
Seat heating 91
Seat heating, individual acti‐
vation 92
Seating position for chil‐
dren 94
Seat, see Memory func‐
tion 90
Seats, front 82
Seats, rear 84
Seat ventilation, active 92
Seat ventilation, individual ac‐
tivation 92
Securing cargo 234
Selection list in instrument
cluster 127
Selector lever, Steptronic
transmission 110
Self-supporting tires, see
Run-flat tires 276
Sensors, care 325
Service and warranty 9
Service Center, see Accident
Assistance 317
Service requirements 124
Service requirements, see
Condition Based Service
CBS 305
Services, ConnectedDrive,
see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication 6
SET button, see Active
Cruise Control with
Stop&Go function 175
SET button, see Cruise con‐
trol 173
Set speed, see Active Cruise
Control with Stop&Go func‐
tion 175
Settings, locking/unlock‐
ing 74
Settings on Control Dis‐
play 39
Shift paddles on the steering
wheel 110
Side airbag 140
Side collision warning 161
Side protection without Sur‐
round View 189
Side protection with Surround
View 197
Signaling, horn 16
Signals when unlocking, see
Confirmation signals from
the vehicle 75
Sitting safely 82
Sizes, see Dimensions 328
Ski and snowboard bag 239
Slide/tilt glass roof, see Glass
sunroof 79
Smallest turning radius 328
Smartphone, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Smoker's package 226
SMS, see Short messages,
see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 6
SMS text message, supple‐
mentary 122
Snow chains 281
Socket for OBD Onboard Di‐
agnosis 306
Sockets 227
Software update 50
Soot particulate filter 243
SOS button, see Intelligent
emergency call 317
Sound output, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Spare tire, see Emergency
wheel 294
Special equipment, see Vehi‐
cle features and options 7
Speed limit display, see
Speed Limit Info 125
Speed Limit Info 125
Speed, see Average speed
and average fuel consump‐
tion 129
Speed warning 130
Split screen 30
Sport chassis/suspension,
see Adaptive M chassis 208
Sport displays 130
SPORT INDIVIDUAL, see
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 115
SPORT PLUS, see Driving
Dynamics Control 115
Sport program, Steptronic
transmission 110
SPORT, see Driving Dynam‐
ics Control 115
Sport steering, variable 172
Stability control systems 168
Standard equipment, see Ve‐
hicle features and options 7
Standard view, Head-up Dis‐
play 132
Standby state, idle state and
drive-ready state 21
Start/stop, automatic func‐
tion 100
Start/Stop button 99
Starting aid terminals 319
Starting, see Drive-ready
state 99
Starting the engine, see
Drive-ready state 99
Stations, AM/FM, see Own‐
er's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Seite 342
Reference Everything from A to Z
342
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Status control display,
tires 283
Status field symbols 30
Status information, iDrive 30
Status of Owner's Manual 7
Status, vehicle 131
Steering and lane control as‐
sistant incl. Traffic Jam As‐
sist 182
Steering wheel, adjusting 90
Steering wheel, buttons 16
Steering wheel, see Memory
function 90
Steptronic Sport transmis‐
sion, see Steptronic trans‐
mission 110
Steptronic transmission 110
Stopping the engine, see
Drive-ready state 99
Storage compartment in the
center console 230
Storage compartments in the
cargo area 235
Storage compartments, loca‐
tions 229
Storage, tires 276
Storing the vehicle 325
Stowing and securing
cargo 234
Straps for cargo, see Lashing
eyes in the cargo area 234
Suitable devices 44
Suitable mobile phones 44
Summer tires, tread 273
Sun visor 225
Supplementary Owner's
Manuals 52
Supplementary SMS text
message 122
Surround View 193
Suspension settings, see
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 115
Swinging of trailer, see Trailer
stabilization control 249
Switches, see Cockpit 16
Switch for driving dynamics,
see Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 115
Symbols and displays 7
SYNC program, automatic cli‐
mate control 215
T
Tachometer 123
Tailgate via remote con‐
trol 60
Tail lights, see Lights and
bulbs 308
Technical changes, see For
Your Own Safety 8
Technical data 328
Telephone, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Teleservices, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Television, TV, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 210, 212
Temperature display, see Ex‐
ternal temperature 123
Temperature, engine oil 123
Theft alarm system, see
Alarm system 76
Thigh support, sport seat 83
Tilt alarm sensor 77
Tilt, backrest 83
Tilting the passenger's side
mirror, see Automatic Curb
Monitor, exterior mirror 89
Time 39
Time of arrival 129
Tire brands, recom‐
mended 275
Tire damage 274
Tire identification marks 272
Tire inflation pressure 268
Tire inflation pressure moni‐
tor, see FTM Flat Tire Moni‐
tor 288
Tire pressure 268
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 281
Tire repair kit, see Mobility
System 277
Tires and wheels 268
Tires, changing 274
Tire sealant, see Mobility
System 277
Tire settings 282
Tires, run-flat 276
Tire tread 273
Tone, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication 6
Tool 307
Torque display, see Sport
displays 130
Touchpad 29
Touchscreen 28
Tow bar 320
Tow fitting 321
Towing 319
Tow rope 320
Tow-starting 319
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 281
Traction control 169
TRACTION, driving dynam‐
ics 169
Traffic bulletins, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Traffic Jam Assist, see Steer‐
ing and lane control assis‐
tant 182
Trailer hitch 249
Trailer hitch, care 325
Trailer loads 329
Seite 343
Everything from A to Z Reference
343
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Trailer stabilization con‐
trol 249
Trailer towing 247
Trailer towing, activation 249
Trailer towing, technical
data 329
Transmission lock, electronic
unlocking 114
Transmission, see Steptronic
transmission 110
Transporting children
safely 94
Travel information, see On‐
board Computer on the
Control Display 130
Tread, tires 273
Trip computer 130
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 106
Trip odometer 128
Trip recorder, see Trip odom‐
eter 128
Turning circle 328
Turning radius lines, rearview
camera 192, 196
Turn signals, bulb replace‐
ment, see Lights and
bulbs 308
Turn signals, high beams,
headlight flasher 106
TV, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 6
U
Unintentional alarm, avoid‐
ing 77
Units of measurement 40
Universal remote control 223
Unlock button, Steptronic
transmission 110
Unlocking, automatic 75
Unlocking, settings 74
Unlocking with the remote
control 59
Unpaved roads, cross-coun‐
try trips 242
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 7
Update, software 50
Upholstery material care 324
USB connection 46
USB interface, position in ve‐
hicle 228
Used battery, disposing
of 314
Use, intended 8
V
Vanity mirror 225
Variable sport steering 172
Vehicle battery 313
Vehicle breakdown, see
Breakdown assistance 315
Vehicle, break-in 242
Vehicle care 323
Vehicle care products 323
Vehicle features and op‐
tions 7
Vehicle identification num‐
ber 12
Vehicle key, see Remote con‐
trol 58
Vehicle paint 323
Vehicle position, vehicle loca‐
tion 40
Vehicle status 131
Vehicle storage 325
Vehicle wash 322
Vehicle, washing 322
Ventilation 215
Ventilation, see Parked-car
ventilation 218
Venting, see Ventilation 215
Vent, see Ventilation 215
Video, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication 6
VIN, see Vehicle identification
number 12
Voice activation system 36
Voice command response,
see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 6
W
Warning against cross traf‐
fic 205
Warning and indicator lights,
see Check Control 119
Warning light in the exterior
mirror, see Active Blind Spot
Detection 157
Warning light in the exterior
mirror, see Crossing traffic
warning 205
Warning messages, see
Check Control 119
Warning triangle 315
Warranty 8
Washer fluid 109
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 108
Washer system 106
Washing the vehicle 322
Water on roads 244
Water, see Condensation wa‐
ter under the parked vehi‐
cle 245
Website 6
Weights 329
Welcome Light Carpet, see
Welcome light 135
Welcome light during unlock‐
ing 59
Welcome lights 135
Welcome screen, driver pro‐
files 72
Wheelbase, vehicle 328
Wheel cleaner, light-alloy
wheels 324
Wheels and tires 268
Wheels, changing 274
Seite 344
Reference Everything from A to Z
344
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
Wheels, see FTM Flat Tire
Monitor 288
Width, vehicle 328
WiFi connection 47
Window defroster,
rear 211, 215
Window, defrosting and de‐
fogging 211, 215
Windows, powered 78
Windshield washer fluid, see
Washer fluid 109
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 108
Windshield washer system,
see Washer/wiper sys‐
tem 106
Windshield wiper, see Wiper
system 106
Winter storage, see Long-
term vehicle storage 325
Winter tires 275
Winter tires, tread 273
Wiper blades, replacing 307
Wiper fluid, see Washer
fluid 109
Wiper, fold-away posi‐
tion 108
Wiper, see Washer/wiper sys‐
tem 106
Wiper system 106
Wireless charging dock, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Wireless charging, see Wire‐
less charging, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Wood parts, care 324
Wordmatch principle, see En‐
try comparison 27
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle
tool kit 307
X
xDrive 170
Seite 345
Everything from A to Z Reference
345
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
01402984955 ue
*BL2984955000*
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984955 - X/17
